Kyocera 3550ci User Manual To The 48a0b825 2267 470e 9b3d 6c90f0230c58

User Manual: Kyocera 3550ci to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 578 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OPERATION GUIDE
TASKalfa
3050ci / 3550ci
4550ci / 5550ci
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of 3050ci/3550ci/4550ci/5550ci.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy
reference.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.
A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.
In this Operation Guide, 3050ci/3550ci/4550ci/5550ci are referred to as 30/30 ppm model, 35/35 ppm model,
45/45 ppm model, and 55/50 ppm model respectively.
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Quick Guide
Describes the procedures for frequently-used operations.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
Safety Guide (3050ci/3550ci/4550ci/5550ci)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary labels, and other information. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
DVD (Product Library)
• Operation Guide (This Guide) • Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
• FAX Operation Guide • KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
• Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide • KMnet Viewer User Guide
• Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide • File Management Utilitiy User Guide
• Command Center RX Operation Guide • PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
• Printer Driver User Guide • PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
i
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.
The - symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result
from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the
related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage
may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with the related points.
.... [General warning]
.... [Warning of high temperature]
.... [Warning of prohibited action]
.... [Disassembly prohibited]
.... [Alert of required action]
.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
.... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground
connection]
Contents
ii
Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiii
Laser Safety (Europe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
1Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2 Preparation before Use
Check the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Original Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Selecting Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Confirmation Screen of Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Using the Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Using Weekly Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Checking Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Contents
iii
4 Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Paper Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Margin/Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Border Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Page #. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Memo Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Poster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Text Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Bates Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Single Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hue Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
One-touch Image Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Background Density Adj.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Prevent Bleed-thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Negative Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
OHP Backing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
5Printing
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
6 Sending Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Sending Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2-sided/Book Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Original Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Contents
iv
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Background Density Adj.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Border Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
E-mail Subject/Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
(Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Scanning using TWAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Text Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Bates Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Scanning with FMU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
7Document Box
Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
8 Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
9 Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Document Box/Removable Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Restart Entire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Contents
v
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104
Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Document Guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107
Optional Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110
10 Management
User Login Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Job Accounting Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
11 Maintenance
Regular Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
12 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Responding when Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Appendix
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-9
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-21
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-32
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
vi
Quick Guide
*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
To make copies To print
Simply press the Start key to make
copies. You can also fine-tune the
copy settings by changing the
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.
You can print via a network or print
a PDF file directly from USB
memory.
Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information
before using this machine.
Administrator tasks
It copies.
It prints.
Copying with
specific
settings
Printing Documents
Stored in Removable
USB Memory
Print
via a
network
Connecting Cables
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the printer
driver on your
computer *1
What
you want
to do
Setup
Loading Paper...2-27
Copying Functions
...4-1
Printing
Documents Stored
in Removable USB
Memory...
7-22
Operation
Printing -
Printing from
Applications
...5-2
Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-44
vii
To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
Administrator tasks
It sends.
Connecting Cables
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Create a shared folder on the destination computer.
Plug in the USB
memory
*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.
Setup
Send
as
E-mail
Send to
Folder
(SMB)
Saving
Documents to
USB Memory
What
you want
to do
Sending...3-23
Sending Functions...6-1
Operation
Saving Documents
to USB Memory
(Scan to USB)...7-24
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One
Touch Keys)...9-79
*1
Placing Originals on the Platen...2-44
viii
To send a FAX
As well as sending a FAX via telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX System
(V) Operation Guide.
Administrator tasks
It faxes.
FAX directly
from a
computer
FAX without using the
telephone line
(Internet FAX (i-FAX))
Send a FAX
Connect the modular cord for the
telephone line to this machine.
Selection of Telephone Line
(Inch version only)
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the Network FAX
Driver on your computer *1
*1:For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the
address directly.
Setup
What
you want
to do
Using the Address Book...3-17
on the FAX System (V) Operation Guide
Loading Paper...2-27
FAX Operation
(Basic)...3-1
on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Operation
About Network
FAX...9-1
on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Internet Fax (i-FAX)
(Optional)...8-1
on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
*2
ix
Menu Map
(The names displayed on the touch panel are used here. These may differ from the referenced titles.)
Org./Paper/Finishing Original Size (page 4-2)
Paper Selection (page 4-3)
Mixed Size Originals (page 4-6)
Original Orientation (page 4-9)
Fold (page 4-11)
Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
Staple/Punch Staple
(page 3-19)
Punch
(page 3-21)
Paper Output (page 4-13)
Color/Image Quality Density (page 3-9)
Original Image (page 3-10)
Color Selection Auto Color
(page 3-7)
Full Color
(page 3-7)
Black & White
(page 3-7)
Single Color
(page 4-34)
EcoPrint (page 4-34)
Color Balance (page 4-35)
Hue Adjustment (page 4-36)
One-touch Image Adjust (page 4-37)
Sharpness (page 4-39)
Background Density Adj. (page 4-40)
Saturation (page 4-41)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-42)
Layout/Edit Zoom (page 3-11)
Combine (page 4-14)
x
Margin/Centering (page 4-16)
Border Erase (page 4-18)
Booklet (page 4-20)
Duplex (page 3-13)
Cover (page 4-22)
Form Overlay (page 4-23)
Page # (page 4-24)
Memo Page (page 4-26)
Poster (page 4-28)
Image Repeat (page 4-29)
Text Stamp (page 4-31)
Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
Advanced Setup Continuous Scan (page 4-43)
Auto Image Rotation (page 4-44)
Negative Image (page 4-44)
Mirror Image (page 4-45)
Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
File Name Entry (page 4-48)
Priority Override (page 4-48)
Repeat Copy (page 4-49)
OHP Backing Sheet (page 4-51)
Program (page 3-56)
Destination Address Book (page 3-40)
E-mail Addr Entry (page 3-24)
Folder Path Entry (page 3-25)
FAX No. Entry (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
i-FAX Addr Entry (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
WSD Scan (page 6-30)
Org./Sending Data Format Original Size (page 6-2)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
xi
Original Orientation (page 6-12)
Sending Size (page 6-4)
File Format (page 6-14)
File Separation (page 6-15)
Long Original (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
Advanced Setup Zoom (page 6-6)
Centering (page 6-7)
Border Erase (page 6-26)
FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-35)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Direct Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Polling RX
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Send and Print (page 6-36)
Send and Store (page 6-36)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-37)
Text Stamp (page 6-38)
Bates Stamp (page 6-39)
Program (page 3-56)
xii
Custom Box Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-2)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
Original Orientation (page 6-12)
Storing Size (page 7-4)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)
Zoom (page 6-6)
Centering (page 6-7)
Border Erase (page 6-26)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-35)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
Open Print Functions Paper Selection (page 4-3)
Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
Staple/Punch Staple
(page 3-19)
Punch
(page 3-21)
Paper Output (page 4-13)
Combine (page 4-14)
Margin/Centering (page 4-16)
Booklet (page 4-20)
Duplex (page 3-13)
Cover (page 4-22)
Form Overlay (page 7-9)
Page # (page 4-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
File Name Entry (page 4-48)
Delete after Printed
(page 7-2)
xiii
Priority Override (page 4-48)
EcoPrint (page 4-34)
Zoom (page 6-6)
Fold (page 4-11)
Text Stamp (page 4-31)
Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
Color Balance (page 4-35)
Hue Adjustment (page 4-36)
One-touch Image Adjust
(page 4-37)
Saturation (page 4-41)
Color/Image
Quality
Density (page 3-9)
Original Image (page 3-10)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 4-39)
Background Density Adj.
(page 4-40)
Prevent Bleed-thru
(page 4-42)
Send Destination (page 3-40)
Functions Sending Size (page 6-4)
File Format (page 6-14)
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation
Guide)
Centering (page 6-7)
FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation
Guide)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-35)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
E-mail Subject/Body
(page 6-29)
i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to Fax Operation
Guide)
FTP Encrypted TX
(page 6-37)
Delete after Transmitted
(page 7-8)
xiv
Zoom (page 6-6)
File Separation (page 6-15)
Text Stamp (page 6-38)
Bates Stamp (page 6-39)
Color/Image
Quality
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Resolution (page 6-18)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
Prevent Bleed-thru
(page 6-25)
Join (page 7-11)
Move/Copy (page 7-10)
Detail (page 3-46)
Search(Name) (page 3-46)
Search(No.) (page 3-46)
Add/Edit Box (page 7-2)
Job Box Private Print/Stored Job (page 7-14)
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 7-15)
Repeat Copy (page 7-18)
Form for Form Overlay (page 7-20)
Removable
Memory
Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-2)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
Original Orientation (page 6-12)
Storing Size (page 7-4)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25)
Density (page 6-19)
Original Image (page 6-18)
Scan Resolution (page 6-20)
Color Selection (page 6-23)
Sharpness (page 6-21)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)
Zoom (page 6-6)
Centering (page 6-7)
xv
Border Erase (page 6-26)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-35)
File Name Entry (page 6-28)
File Format (page 6-14)
Text Stamp (page 6-38)
Bates Stamp (page 6-39)
Print Functions Paper Selection (page 4-3)
Collate/Offset (page 3-15)
Staple/Punch Staple
(page 3-19)
Punch
(page 3-21)
Paper Output (page 4-13)
Duplex (page 3-13)
Job Finish Notice (page 4-46)
Priority Override (page 4-48)
Fold (page 4-11)
Text Stamp (page 4-31)
Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 7-23)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-23)
XPS Fit to Page (page 7-23)
Color/
Image
Quality
Color Selection (page 6-23)
FAX Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Program (page 3-56)
Printing Jobs (page 8-3)
Sending Jobs (page 8-5)
Storing Jobs (page 8-6)
Device/Communication (page 8-14)
Paper/Supplies (page 8-13)
xvi
Common Settings Language (page 9-2)
Default Screen (page 9-3)
Sound Buzzer (page 9-4)
FAX Speaker Volume
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
FAX Monitor Volume
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Keyboard Layout (page Appendix-9)
Original / Paper
Settings
Custom Original Size (page 9-4)
Custom Paper Size (page 9-5)
Cassette Setting (page 9-6)
MP Tray Setting (page 9-7)
Media Type Setting (page 9-8)
Default Paper Source (page 9-9)
Original Auto Detect (page 9-10)
Media for Auto (Color) (page 9-10)
Media for Auto (B & W) (page 9-10)
Paper Source for Cover (page 9-11)
Special Paper Action (page 9-11)
Measurement (page 9-12)
Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 9-13)
Finishing Error (page 9-13)
No Staple Error (page 9-13)
Finished Pages Exceeded (page 9-13)
Punch Waste Full Error (page 9-14)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 9-14)
Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 9-14)
Paper Jam before Staple (page 9-14)
Paper Output (page 9-15)
Orientation Confirmation (page 9-16)
Color Toner Empty Action (page 9-16)
Function Defaults Original Orientation (page 9-17)
Original Image (Copy) (page 9-17)
Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 9-18)
Scan Resolution (page 9-18)
FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
xvii
Color Selection (Copy) (page 9-19)
Color Select.(Send/Store) (page 9-19)
File Format (page 9-20)
File Separation (page 9-20)
Backgrnd Density (Copy) (page 9-21)
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store)
(page 9-21)
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) (page 9-21)
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store)
(page 9-22)
Zoom (page 9-22)
Border Erase Default (page 9-23)
Border Erase to Back Page
(page 9-23)
Margin Default (page 9-24)
Auto Image Rotation (page 9-24)
EcoPrint (page 9-24)
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint)
(page 9-25)
High Comp. PDF Image (page 9-25)
Color TIFF Compression (page 9-26)
Image Quality (File Format)
(page 9-26)
Collate/Offset (page 9-26)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 9-27)
XPS Fit to Page (page 9-27)
Continuous Scan (page 9-27)
PDF/A (page 9-28)
File Name Entry (page 9-28)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 9-29)
Repeat Copy (page 9-29)
USB Keyboard Type (page 9-30)
System Stamp (page 9-30)
Manual Staple (page 9-39)
Customize Status Display (page 9-40)
Low Toner Alert Level (page 9-40)
xviii
Copy Paper Selection (page 9-41)
Auto Paper Selection (page 9-42)
Auto % Priority (page 9-42)
Reserve Next Priority (page 9-43)
Preset Limit (page 9-43)
Quick Setup Registration (page 9-43)
Send Quick Setup Registration (page 9-44)
Dest. Check before Send (page 9-44)
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 9-45)
Color Type (page 9-45)
Default Screen (page 9-46)
Send and Forward (page 9-46)
Document Box/
Removable Memory
Custom Box (page 9-53)
FAX Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 7-15)
Repeat Copy Job Retention
(page 7-18)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 7-21)
Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Quick Setup Registration (page 9-54)
FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Printer Emulation (page 9-55)
Color Setting (page 9-56)
Gloss Mode (page 9-56)
EcoPrint (page 9-57)
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) (page 9-57)
Override A4/Letter (page 9-57)
Duplex (page 9-58)
Copies (page 9-58)
Orientation (page 9-59)
Form Feed Timeout (page 9-59)
LF Action (page 9-60)
CR Action (page 9-60)
Job Name (page 9-60)
User Name (page 9-61)
Paper Feed Mode (page 9-61)
xix
System Network Host Name (page 9-92)
TCP/IP Setting TCP/IP
(page 9-92)
IPv4 (page 9-93)
IPv6 (page 9-94)
Protocol Detail
(page 9-96)
NetWare (page 9-97)
AppleTalk (page 9-97)
WSD Scan (page 9-98)
WSD Print (page 9-98)
Enhanced WSD (page 9-98)
Enhanced WSD (SSL) (page 9-99)
Secure Protocol SSL (page 9-99)
IPP Security
(page 9-100)
HTTP Security
(page 9-100)
LDAP Security
(page 9-101)
SMTP Security
(page 9-101)
POP3 Security
(User 1)
(page 9-102)
POP3 Security
(User 2)
(page 9-102)
POP3 Security
(User 3)
(page 9-102)
IPSec (page 9-102)
LAN Interface (page 9-103)
Restart Network (page 9-103)
Restart Entire Device (page 9-91)
Interface Block
Setting
USB Host (page 9-104)
USB Device (page 9-104)
Optional Interface 1 (page 9-104)
Optional Interface 2 (page 9-104)
Security Level (page 9-105)
xx
Document Guard (page 9-105)
Data Security (page 9-107)
Optional Function (page 9-109)
Date/Timer Date/Time (page 9-74)
Date Format (page 9-74)
Time Zone (page 9-75)
Auto Panel Reset (page 9-75)
Auto Sleep (page 9-76)
Auto Error Clear (page 9-77)
Low Power Timer (page 9-76)
Panel Reset Timer (page 9-75)
Sleep Timer (page 9-77)
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 9-78)
Error Job Skip (page 9-78)
Error Clear Timer (page 9-77)
Adjustment/
Maintenance
Density Adjustment Copy (page 9-66)
Send/Box (page 9-66)
Background Density
Adj.
Copy (Auto) (page 9-67)
Send/Box (Auto) (page 9-67)
Drum Refresh (page 9-67)
Correcting Black Line (page 9-68)
System Initialization (page 9-68)
Display Brightness (page 9-69)
Silent Mode (page 9-69)
Auto Color Correction (page 9-69)
Color Registration (page 9-69)
Calibration Cycle (page 9-71)
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 9-72)
Calibration (page 9-72)
Developer Refresh (page 9-73)
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 9-73)
First Print Position (page 9-73)
Report Print Report Status Page (page 9-62)
Font List (page 9-62)
Network Status (page 9-63)
Service Status (page 9-63)
xxi
Result Report Setting Send Result Report (page 9-63)
FAX RX Result Report
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Job Finish Notice Setting
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Sending Log History Auto Sending (page 9-64)
Send Log History (page 9-65)
Destination (page 9-64)
Job Log Subject (page 9-65)
Edit Destination Address Book (page 9-79)
One Touch Key (page 9-83)
Print List (refer to Fax Operation Guide)
Address Book
Defaults
Sort (page 9-85)
Narrow Down (page 9-85)
User Login/Job
Accounting
User Login Setting User Login (page 10-2)
Local User List (page 10-5)
Local Authorization (page 10-9)
Group
Authorization Set.
Group
Authorization
(page 10-10)
Group List
(page 10-11)
Guest
Authorization Set.
Guest
Authorization
(page 10-12)
Guest Property
(page 10-13)
Obtain NW User Property
(page 10-15)
Simple Login
Settings
Simple Login
(page 10-17)
Simple Login Key
(page 10-17)
Job Accounting
Setting
Job Accounting (page 10-20)
Print Accounting Report (page 10-32)
Total Job Accounting (page 10-29)
Each Job Accounting (page 10-29)
Accounting List (page 10-22)
xxii
Default Setting Apply Limit
(page 10-26)
Copy/Printer
Count
(page 10-24)
Default Counter
Limit
(page 10-26)
Count by Paper
Size
(page 10-30)
Unknown ID Job (page 10-10)
User Property(page 10-9)
Application (page 9-109)
Internet (page 9-86)
xxiii
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
• Humidity: 15 to 80%
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
Use coated paper at a temperature of 80.6 °F (27°C) or less and a humidity of 60% or less.
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at a
temperature: around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid the
following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is
too high or too low.
Message: "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." or "Warning for low temperature.
Adjust the room temperature."
To use the machine under optimum conditions, adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the
message is displayed.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is easily damaged by casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may
be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
xxiv
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion,
as well as contact with your eyes and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of
temperature and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not
turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.
xxv
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this
machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the
product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine.
xxvi
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the
product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a
protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological
Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in
the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown
below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the
United States. On this machine, the label is on the right.
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is
the label located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the right cover is opened.
xxvii
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional
switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les
interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors
tension.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device contains the module, which complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radio Tag Technology
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)
This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
xxviii
Warranty (the United States)
3050ci/3550ci/4550ci/5550ci
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant
the Customer’s new color Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”), and the new accessories
installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for
a period of one (1) year, or 300,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In
the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s
only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts.
Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the
original MFP for a period of one year or 300,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance
Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement
Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty.
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new
Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized
Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide
service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera
Dealer in your area, or check Kyocera’s website at http://www.kyoceramita.com.
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b)
have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have been
installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer, or
(d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY
OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS
WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR
INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
xxix
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law.
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
• Paper money
• Bank note
• Securities
•Stamp
•Passport
• Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB
(A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren
Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
xxx
Legal and Safety Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on
the following topics.
• Legal Information ...............................................................................xxxi
• Regarding Trade Names....................................................................xxxi
• Energy Saving Control Function .................................................... xxxviii
• Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ................................................. xxxviii
• Paper Recycling............................................................................. xxxviii
• Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program...................................... xxxviii
• About this Operation Guide .............................................................xxxix
xxxi
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita
Corporation is prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and KPDL are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008,
Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
• TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype
Imaging Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered
trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• This machine contains the NF module developed by
ACCESS Co., Ltd.
• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO.,
LTD.
• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or
registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD.in the United States, Japan and other countries.
• © 2011 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective
companies. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
xxxii
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html) software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy,
redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the
source code, visit http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl/.
Open SSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/
/www.openssl.org/)”
4The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
xxxiii
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgment:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
xxxiv
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a
special format as well as the UFST Software.
2You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-
user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the
original.
5This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and
Typefaces.
9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior
written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.
xxxv
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Apache License (Version 2.0)
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by,
or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software
source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
xxxvi
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of
electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not
limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving
the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing
by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has
been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license
to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated
in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer
the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are
necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work
to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the
Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under
this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following
conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
xxxvii
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this
License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall
supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor
regarding such Contributions.
6Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks,
or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES
OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the
Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or
agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect,
special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of
the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work
stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You
may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act
only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims
asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class
name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance
with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed
on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
xxxviii
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain
amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions
remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the
device within a set amount of time.
Low Power Mode
The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm, 35/35 ppm, or 45/45 ppm
model) or 5 minutes (for the 55/50 ppm model) have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time
of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer
to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 30 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm model), 45 minutes (for the
35/35 ppm model), or 60 minutes (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm model) have passed since the device was
last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For
more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information
see Duplex on page 3-13.
Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that
this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
xxxix
About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter 1 - Part Names
Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.
Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use
Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use.
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation
Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.
Chapter 4 - Copying Functions
Describes the functions you can use when copying.
Chapter 5 - Printing
Describes the functions you can use when printing originals.
Chapter 6 - Sending Functions
Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.
Chapter 7 - Document Box
Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.
Chapter 8 - Status / Job Cancel
Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission
Chapter 9 - Default Setting (System Menu)
Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.
Chapter 10 - Management
Explains user login administration and job accounting.
Chapter 11 - Maintenance
Describes cleaning and toner replacement.
Chapter 12 - Troubleshooting
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.
Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
xl
Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.
Description of Operation Procedure
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Convention Description Example
Bold Indicates the operation panel
keys or a computer screen.
Press the Start key.
[Regular] Indicates the touch panel keys. Press [OK].
Italic Indicates a message displayed
on the touch panel.
Ready to copy is displayed.
Used to emphasize a key word,
phrase or references to
additional information.
For more information refer to Sleep and
Auto Sleep on page 2-9.
Note Indicates supplemental
information or operations for
reference.
NOTE:
Important Indicates items that are required
or prohibited so as to avoid
problems.
IMPORTANT:
Caution Indicates what must be
observed to prevent injury or
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.
CAUTION:
Actual procedure Description in this
Operation Guide
Press [Copy].
Press [Next] of Quick Setup.
Press [ ] twice.
Press [Change] of Original Image.
Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick
Setup, [ ] twice, and then
[Change] of Original Image.
xli
Originals and Paper Sizes
This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.
As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is
indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.
Icons on the Touch Panel
The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.
Placement direction Indicated size *
* The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the
function and source tray. For further details, refer to the page
detailing that function or source tray.
Vertical direction A4, B5, A5, B6,
A6, 16K, Letter,
Statement
For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer
than B.
Horizontal direction A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
B6-R, A6-R, 16K-
R, Letter-R,
Statement-R
For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter
than B.
Placement direction Originals Paper
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction
Original Paper
Original Paper
xlii
1-1
1Part Names
This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.
• Operation Panel..................................................................................1-2
• Machine ..............................................................................................1-4
Part Names
1-2
Operation Panel
Displays the Copy screen.
Displays the screen for sending.
You can also change this to show the address book screen.
Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the
Copy screen or Send screen.
Displays the Document Box screen.
Displays the Application screen.
Blinks during printing, fax sending and receiving,
scan send, and print data receiving.
Displays help guidance.
Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
Displays the FAX screen.
Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk,
fax memory or USB memory (general-purpose item).
Lights or blinks when an error occurs
and a job is stopped.
Displays the Program screen.
Displays the System Menu.
Returns settings to their default states.
Displays number
of sheets printed
and number of
pages scanned.
Part Names
1-3
1
Lit when the machine's
main power is on.
Puts the machine into Sleep
Mode. Recovers from Sleep
if in Sleep Mode.
Perform user switching
authentication and logout.
Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
Pauses the printing job in progress.
Starts copying and scanning operations
and processing for setting operations.
Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes screen
during setting of functions. Operates linked with
the on-screen [OK].
Recalls already registered destinations
and programs for sending.
Clears entered numbers and characters.
Numeric keys.
Enter numbers and symbols.
Scans all documents in black & white.
Scans all documents in full color.
Automatically recognizes whether a document is color
or black & white and then scans the document.
Puts the machine into Low Power Mode.
Part Names
1-4
Machine
1Platen Cover (Option)
2Mailbox (Option)
3Front Cover
4Document Finisher (Option)
5Cassette 1 to 7 (Cassette 3 to 7 are Options)
• 5-a: Cassette 1 • 5-b: Cassette 2 • 5-c: Cassette 3 • 5-d: Cassette 4
• 5-e: Cassette 5 • 5-f: Cassette 6 • 5-g: Cassette 7
• 5-h: Cassette 5 • 5-i: Cassette 3 or 6 • 5-j: Cassette 4 or 7
2
4
5
1
3
5-i
5-j
5-h
5-e
5-f
5-g
5-b 5-a
5-c
5-d
Part Names
1-5
1
17
21
25
18
16
24
20 22
12
13
14
15
19
10
11
7
8
9
6
23
6Network Interface Connector
7USB Port (A2)
8USB Interface Connector (B1)
9Option Interface
10 Original Size Indicator Plates
11 Slit Glass
12 Toner Container (Black)
13 Toner Container (Magenta)
14 Toner Container (Cyan)
15 Toner Container (Yellow)
16 Document Processor (Option)
17 Platen
18 Clip Holder
19 Operation Panel
20 Handles
21 Release button
22 Waste Toner Box
23 Cleaning Brush
24 Waste Toner Tray
25 Toner Container Release Lever
Part Names
1-6
26 Paper Length Guide
27 (Paper Width Guide) Lock
28 Inner Tray
29 USB Port (A1)
30 Right Cover 1 Lever
31 Right Cover 1
32 Main Power Switch
33 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
34 Handle
35 Right Cover 2 Lever
36 Right Cover 2
37 Paper Width Guide
38 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray
39 Multi Purpose Tray
40 Right Cover 3 Lever
41 Right Cover 3
34
33
26 27 29 30 31
39
41
28 32
37
38
40
35
36
2-1
2 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well
as the procedures for loading paper and originals.
• Check the Accessories .......................................................................2-2
• Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables...............2-3
• Connecting Cables..............................................................................2-5
• Power On/Off ......................................................................................2-7
• Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode....................................2-9
• Sleep and Auto Sleep .......................................................................2-10
• Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle................................................2-10
• Switching the Language for Display [Language]...............................2-11
• Setting Date and Time ......................................................................2-12
• Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ..........................................2-13
• Installing Software.............................................................................2-16
• Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail).......................................2-24
• Loading Paper...................................................................................2-27
• Loading Originals..............................................................................2-44
Preparation before Use
2-2
Check the Accessories
Check that the following accessories are included.
• Safety Guide
• Quick Guide
• DVD (Product Library)
• CD-ROM (TWAIN compatible application)*
* This accessory is not included in some countries and regions.
Documents Contained in the Included DVD
The following documents are contained in the included DVD (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.
Documents
Operation Guide (This Guide)
FAX Operation Guide
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Command Center RX Operation Guide
Printer Driver User Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
KMnet Viewer User Guide
File Management Utilitiy User Guide
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Preparation before Use
2-3
2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.
Connection Example
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network
cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
FAX (Option)
Send FTP
Sends the scanned
image as a data file on
the FTP.
Send E-mail
Sends the image data
of scanned originals to
the desired recipient
as a file attached to an
E-mail message.
Send SMB
Saves the scanned
image as a data file on
your PC.
MFP
FAX
Administrator’s
PC
Command Center RX
Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and
destination registration
Network FAX
(Option)
TWAIN Scanning
WIA Scanning
TWAIN and WIA are
standardized interface
for communication
between software
applications and image
acquisition devices.
USB
Network
Network
Printing
Network
Network
Network
Network
Network
Preparation before Use
2-4
Preparing Necessary Cables
The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables
according to the interface you use.
Available Standard Interfaces
Function Interface Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner
/Network FAX*
* Function available when using optional fax kit. For details on
Network FAX, refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
Network interface LAN (10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Shielded)
Printer USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable
(Hi-Speed USB compliant,
Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
Preparation before Use
2-5
2
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable (Optional)
Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine.
1When the machine is powered up, first press the
Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator, the processing indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After this, turn off the
main power switch.
2Connect the LAN cable to the network interface
connector located on left side of the body.
3Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
4Power on the machine, and configure the network.
For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable
Connection) on page 2-13.
Make sure that lamps
other than this lamp
are off.
Preparation before Use
2-6
Connecting USB Cable
Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine.
1When the machine is powered up, first press the
Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator, the processing indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After this, turn off the
main power switch.
2Connect the USB cable to the USB interface
connector (B1) located on the left side of the body.
3Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Connecting the Power Cable
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
Make sure that lamps
other than this lamp
are off.
Preparation before Use
2-7
2
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit... (Recovery from sleep)
Press the Power key.
When the main power indicator is off...
Open the main power switch cover and turn the main
power switch on.
NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed, a message might display indicating the security function is
being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.
Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
Preparation before Use
2-8
Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the
Power key, the processing indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
If you will not switch of the main power switch, refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9,
and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.
CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key, the Processing indicator or Memory indicator
is lit or blinking. Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.
In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that
turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
Make sure that lamps
other than this lamp
are off.
Preparation before Use
2-9
2
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode
Low Power Mode
To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver
key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation
panel will go out to save power except the Energy
Saver, Power, and main power indicators. This status
is referred to as Low Power Mode.
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the
machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low
Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions. The
30/30 ppm or 35/35 ppm model will be ready to operate
within 15 seconds, or the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm
model will be ready within 20 seconds.
• Press any key on the operation panel.
• Open the platen cover or the optional document
processor.
• Place originals in the optional document processor.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as
ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Low Power Mode
Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time.
The default preset time is 3 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm, 35/35 ppm, or 45/45 ppm model) or 5 minutes (for the
55/50 ppm model).
Preparation before Use
2-10
Sleep and Auto Sleep
Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and
all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Main Power
indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is
performed while the touch panel remains unlit.
When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed
out while the operation panel also remains unlit.
To resume, press the Power key. The 30/30 ppm or
35/35 ppm model will be ready within 20 seconds, or the
45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm model will be ready within 30
seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as
ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode.
The default preset time is 30 minutes (for the 30/30 ppm model), 45 minutes (for the 35/35 ppm model), or 60
minutes (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm model).
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle
Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown
by releasing the operation panel lock lever.
Preparation before Use
2-11
2
Switching the Language for Display [Language]
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to select the language.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of
Language.
3Press the key for the language you want to use.
4Press [OK].
The touch panel language will be changed.
Common Settings - Language
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
Status
Cancel OK
English Deutsch Français
Nederlands Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ Português
Español Italiano
10/10/2010 10:10
Preparation before Use
2-12
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine
is used.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. For details, refer to Optional Function on
page 9-109.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of
Time Zone.
3Select the region.
NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to view the next region.
4Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize
summer time, the summer time setting screen will not
appear.
5Press [Change] of Date/Time.
6Set the date and time. Press [+] or [–] in each
setting.
7Press [OK].
Date/Timer - Time Zone
Set time zone.
Select the location nearest you.
Time Zone
-12:00 International Date Line West
1/13
-11:00 Samoa
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
-08:00 Baja California
Status
Cancel OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Date/Timer - Date/Time
Set the date and time.
Off
DayMonthYear
SecondMinuteHour
2010
10 10 31
10 10
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Cancel OK
Preparation before Use
2-13
2
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings,
refer to the Network on 9-92.
• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup...2-13
• AppleTalk Setup...2-15
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]
of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] and then press [OK].
5Press [Change] of IPv4.
6Press [DHCP].
7Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
8Press [Bonjour].
9Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the
numeric keys.
11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using
the numeric keys.
12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address
using the numeric keys.
System - IPv4
Set TCP/IP (IPv4).
* The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
On
Default
Gateway 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Off
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Off
BonjourDHCP
Status
Cancel OK
On
Auto-IP
10/10/2010 10:10
Preparation before Use
2-14
13 Check if all the address entries are correct and
press [OK].
14 After changing the setting, restart the network from
the system menu, or turn the machine OFF and
then ON.
For detailed information on restarting the network,
refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
DHCP Settings
Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]
of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] and then press [OK].
5Press [Change] of IPv4.
6Press [DHCP].
7Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
8After changing the setting, restart the network from
the system menu, or turn the machine OFF and
then ON.
For detailed information on restarting the network,
refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Bonjour Settings
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.
Refer to Bonjour Settings on page 9-93 about the procedures.
Preparation before Use
2-15
2
Auto-IP Settings
Select whether or not to use Auto-IP. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]
of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] and then press [OK].
5Press [Change] of IPv4.
6Press [Auto-IP].
7Press [On] or [Off] of Auto-IP and then press [OK].
8After changing the setting, restart the network from
the system menu, or turn the machine OFF and
then ON.
For detailed information on restarting the network,
refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.
Refer to AppleTalk on page 9-97 about the procedures.
Preparation before Use
2-16
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD (Product Library) if you want to
use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC.
The following softwares are supported:
• KX driver
• KX (XPS) printer driver
• Mini printer driver (PCL/KPDL)
•TWAIN driver
•WIA driver
• Network FAX driver
• File Management Utility
• KM-NET for Direct Printing
• KMnet Viewer
•Font
NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
The WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.
If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC, follow the next steps to install the software. The example
shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows
NOTE: If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run Setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Allow.
You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software. Express Mode automatically detects
connected machines and installs the required software. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port
and select the software to be installed. For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver User Guide
on the DVD.
1Insert the DVD.
Preparation before Use
2-17
2
2Click View License Agreement and read the
License Agreement. Click Accept.
3Click Install Software.
4Click Express Mode.
5Select the print system to be installed and click
Next.
NOTE: If the print system detection window appears
and the installer fails to detect the machine, verify that
it is connected to the computer via a network or USB
cable and that it is turned on and click Reload.
Preparation before Use
2-18
6Customize the print system name if the print
system is connected via a network and click Next.
7Click Install.
NOTE: If the Windows security window appears, click
Install this driver software anyway.
8A message appears saying that the printer has
been installed successfully. Click Finish.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure. Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the system,
if required.
The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network.
You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-
22) or Setting WIA Driver (page 2-23).
Preparation before Use
2-19
2
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.
The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Macintosh running MAC OS X v10.6.
NOTE: When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine’s emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
For details about the configuration method, refer to Printer on page 9-55.
If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to Bonjour
Settings on page 2-14.
In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
1Insert the DVD.
Double-click the Kyocera icon.
2Double-click either OS X 10.2 and 10.3 Only, OS X
10.4 Only or OS X 10.4 or higher depending on
your Mac OS version.
3Double-click Kyocera OS X vx.x.
4Install the printer driver as directed by the
instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Preparation before Use
2-20
Next, specify the print settings. If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used, the settings below are required. If a
USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
5Open System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
6Click the plus symbol (+).
7Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the
AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and
then enter the IP address and printer name. Click
Add.
NOTE: When using a Bonjour connection, select
[Default] and click the item that appears in "Printer
Name". The driver with the same name as the machine
automatically appears in "Driver".
Preparation before Use
2-21
2
8Select the options available for the machine and
click Continue
9The selected machine is added.
Preparation before Use
2-22
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver.
1Select the Start Button of the Windows display, All
Programs, Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver
Setting. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
2Click Add.
3Enter the machine name in the Name field.
4Select this machine from the list. To scan in a
document stored in a custom box, select a model
name with (Box).
5Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the
Scanner Address.
NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown,
contact the Administrator.
6When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
7When user login administration is enabled, select
the checkbox beside Authentication, and enter a
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters).
To use job accounting, select the checkbox of the
account, enter an Account ID (maximum of 8
digits), and click OK.
8Click OK.
9Click Close.
NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine.
Click Edit to change names.
5
4
3
7
8
6
Preparation before Use
2-23
2
Setting WIA Driver
Register this machine to the WIA Driver.
The following explanation assumes that Windows 7 is being used.
1Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner
in Program and File Search. Click Show
scanners and cameras in the search list. The
Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA
Drivers, and click Properties.
3Enter the machine name or the host name.
4When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
5When user login administration is enabled, select
the checkbox beside Authentication, and enter a
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters).
When job accounting is enabled, select the
checkbox beside Account ID, and enter the
account ID with as many as eight digits.
6Click OK.
5
4
3
6
Preparation before Use
2-24
Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail)
Command Center RX is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing
the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
To change settings in Command Center RX, you must log in as an administrator of the machine.
The default factory settings are set as shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
The procedure for accessing Command Center RX is explained below.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.
e.g.) http://10.183.51.41/
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their
current status.
3Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be
set separately.
If restrictions have been set for Command Center RX, enter the correct user name and password to access
pages other than the startup page.
For details, refer to the Command Center RX Operation Guide.
Preparation before Use
2-25
2
E-mail Setting
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images scanned with this machine as E-mail attachments.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
Before sending images scanned with this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:
• The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
• SMTP Settings
Use Command Center RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
• If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1Click Settings -> Advanced -> SMTP -> General.
Preparation before Use
2-26
2Enter the correct settings in each field.
The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.
3Click Submit.
Item Description
SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be
enabled.
SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the
SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS
server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be
entered on the TCP/IP General tab.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication
Protocol
Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP
as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.
Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a
different account.
Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be
used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is
64 characters.
Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for
authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters.
SMTP Security Enables or disables the SMTP Security. When this protocol is enabled, either
SSL/TLS or STARTTLS must be selected. To enable SMTP security, the SMTP
port may have to be changed according to the server settings. Typically, 465 for
SSL/TLS and 25 or 587 for STARTTLS are well-known SMTP ports.
POP before SMTP
Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have
selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.
Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is
0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.
Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is
128 characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length
of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.
Preparation before Use
2-27
2
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded in the two standard cassettes and the multi purpose tray. Paper feeders are also available
as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
For the paper feed methods for each cassette, refer to the page below.
* The paper feed method is the same as standard cassettes 1 and 2.
** The paper feed method is the same as the Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2).
IMPORTANT:
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment.
• For clearer and brighter color copies, use special color paper.
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause
paper jams or other faults.)
Cassette Name Page
Standard Cassette 1,
Cassette 2
Standard cassettes 2-29
Multi Purpose Tray Multi Purpose Tray 2-36
Option Cassette 3,
Cassette 4
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)* 2-29
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) 2-32
Cassette 5 Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 2-35
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3)* 2-29
Large Capacity Side Feeder
(500*, 1,500-sheet x 2**)
2-29
Cassette 6
Cassette 7
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3)* 2-29
Large Capacity Side Feeder
(500*, 1,500-sheet x 2**)
2-32
Preparation before Use
2-28
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following
steps.
1Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the
middle.
2Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while
keeping the entire stack risen.
3Raise the right and left hands alternately to create
a gap and feed air between the paper.
4Finally, align the paper on a level, flat table.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before
loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a
jam.
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or
clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.
Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
NOTE: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the output paper scatters or stacks unevenly, turn the paper over in the cassette, or change the orientation
(vertical/horizontal) of the paper in the cassette.
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company
name, refer to the Paper on Appendix-12.
Preparation before Use
2-29
2
Loading Paper in the Cassettes
The standard cassettes
The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
Cassette 1 and 2 hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18",
Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R and 216 × 340 mm.
IMPORTANT:
• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type and paper weight settings. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on
page 2-40, Media Type Setting on page 9-8.)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights between 60 and 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or 35/35 ppm) or
between 60 and 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50 ppm). If you are using a paper weight between 106
and 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or 35/35 ppm) or between 106 and 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/
50 ppm), set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 256 g/m2.
• If you wish to use 330 × 210 mm to 356 × 220 mm paper, contact a service technician.
1Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a
time.
2Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length
guide and move the guide to fit the length of the
paper.
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
Preparation before Use
2-30
3Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to release the
lock. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and move
the paper width guides to fit the paper.
4Align the paper flush against the right side of the
cassette.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan
the paper before loading it in the cassette.
(Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-28)
Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,
readjust the guides to fit the paper.
IMPORTANT:
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration on the left).
• When loading the paper, keep the side that was
closest to the package seal facing up.
• The paper length and width guides must be
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed
feeding and paper jams.
Preparation before Use
2-31
2
5Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to lock.
6Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the
size and type of paper to be placed. (The indication
is printed on both sides of the sheet.)
NOTE: Fold the sheet in half and use with the side you
want to display as the front side.
7Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.
8Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded
in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-40.)
Preparation before Use
2-32
The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
The Optional cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) holds up to 3,000 sheets (1,500-sheet x 2) of plain paper
(80 g/m2) (or up to 3,500 sheets (1,750-sheet x 2) of 64 g/m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: A4, B5, Letter.
IMPORTANT:
• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type and paper weight settings. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on
page 2-40,Media Type Setting on page 9-8.)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 256 g/m2. If you are using a paper weight between 106
and 256 g/m2, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 256 g/m2.
1Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
2Rotate the Paper Size Guide (A) clamp and
remove. Pull the Paper Size Guide (A) up and out.
3Insert the Paper Size Guide (A) into the slot
(bottom of cassette) for the paper size to be used.
Make sure that the top of the paper size guide (A)
matches the paper size to be used, attach the
clamp, and rotate the clamp to lock it.
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to
verify that it is fixed.
Paper Size Guide (A)
Clamp
Preparation before Use
2-33
2
4With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way
down, press the hook on the side of the Paper Size
Guide (B) to release it and pull out the Paper Size
Guide (B).
5Adjust the Paper Size Guide (B) to the paper size.
A4
Insert the Paper Size Guide (B) into the slot marked
A4 (on the bottom of the cassette), and lock the
hook (it will make a "click" sound).
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to
verify that it is fixed.
B5
Open the Paper Size Guide (B) as shown, insert
into the slot marked B5 (on the bottom of the
cassette), and lock the hook (it will make a "click"
sound).
Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to
verify that it is fixed.
Letter
The Paper Size Guide (B) is not attached.
Paper Size Guide (B)
Preparation before Use
2-34
6Insert the paper into the cassette.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan
the paper before loading it in the cassette.
(Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-28)
IMPORTANT:
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing
up.
7Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the
size and type of paper to be placed. (The indication
is printed on both sides of the sheet.)
NOTE: Fold the sheet in half and use with the side you
want to display as the front side.
8Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.
9Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded
in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-40.)
Preparation before Use
2-35
2
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
The optional side feeder hold up to 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). The following paper sizes are
supported: A4, B5, Letter.
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops and insert
the paper into the cassette. After loading paper, gently
push the cassette back in.
NOTE: The default paper size setting is A4. If you
need the paper size changed to B5 or Letter, contact
your service representative.
IMPORTANT:
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up.
Preparation before Use
2-36
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 150sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 165 sheets of
64 g/m2 plain paper) or up to 50 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 55 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper) lager
than A4.
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes 12×18" and from A3 to A6-R and Hagaki and from Ledger to
Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always
specify the media type and paper weight settings. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi
Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42, Media Type Setting on page 9-8.) If you are using a paper weight
of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets
(64 g/m2 plain paper :165 sheets)
• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
(64 g/m2 plain paper :55 sheets)
• Hagaki: 30 sheets
• OHP film: 10 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C4, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 10 sheets
• Long documents: 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48"): 1 sheet
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.
1Open the Multi Purpose tray until it stops.
2When loading paper sizes 12×18" and from A3 to
B4 and Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray
section of the multi purpose tray until the mark "∆"
is fully appeared.
Preparation before Use
2-37
2
3Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the
paper.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan
the paper before loading it in the multi-purpose tray.
(Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-28)
4Insert the paper along the paper width guides into
the tray until it stops.
IMPORTANT: Keep the print side facing up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous
job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and
you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper
from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width
guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to
prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the loaded paper does not
exceed the level indicator (see illustration).
Preparation before Use
2-38
Loading Envelopes
Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.
Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.
1Open the multi purpose tray.
2Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the
envelope.
Acceptable Envelope Size
Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2"
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2"
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) 3 7/8"×8 7/8"
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6) 3 5/8"×6 1/2"
Envelope DL 110×220 (mm)
Envelope C4 229×324 (mm)
Envelope C5 162×229 (mm)
Youkei 2 162×114 (mm)
Youkei 4 235×105 (mm)
Preparation before Use
2-39
2
3Insert along the paper width guide all the way in as shown.
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.
When you load envelopes or
cardstock in the multi purpose tray
Load envelopes with the print side facing down.
e.g.) When printing the address.
Open the flap.
Landscape
form
envelopes
Portrait
form
envelopes
Cardstock
(Hagaki)
Return
postcard
(Oufuku
hagaki)
IMPORTANT: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku hagaki).
Close
the flap.
Preparation before Use
2-40
Specifying Paper Size and Media (Cassette Setting)
The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for the multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder
(cassettes 3 to 7) is [Auto], and the default media type setting is [Plain].
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-40.)
To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42.)
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeders (cassettes 3 to 7), specify
the paper size. Also, if you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown
below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Thick, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8
Selection Item Selectable Size/Type
Paper
Size
Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the
paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.
Standard
Sizes 1*
* Only A4, Letter, and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-
sheet x 2) and the optional Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) are used.
Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2*
Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum** (60 to 105 g/m2 or less),
Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond**, Color**, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**, High Quality and Custom 1~8**
** To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. When
the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting
cannot be selected.
• Rough: Heavy 5 • Vellum: Heavy 5
• Preprinted: Heavy 5 • Color: Heavy 5
• Letterhead: Heavy 5 • Thick: Heavy 5
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 5, or Extra Heavy
On the 30/30 ppm model and 35/35 ppm model, the paper of each also cannot be selected
when Heavy 4 is set.
*** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on
page 9-11.
Preparation before Use
2-41
2
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /
Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting.
3Cassette Setting, select one of [Cassette 1] to
[Cassette 7] and press [Next].
Then press [Change] of Paper Size.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 7] are shown when
the optional paper feeder is installed.
4For automatic detection of the paper size, press
[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1]
or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.
5Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
6Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
media type. Then press [OK].
Common Settings - Paper Size
Set cassette paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1
Auto
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
A3 A4
Standard
Sizes 2
A4 A5
B4 B5 B5
Cancel OK
216x340mm
Common Settings - Media Type
Select type of paper in Cassette 1.
VellumPlain
PreprintedRecycled Bond
LetterheadPrepunched
Color
Custom 2Custom 1
High Quality
Custom 3 Custom 4
Custom 7Custom 6
Custom 5
Custom 8
Status
Cancel OK
Thick
Rough
10/10/2010 10:10
Preparation before Use
2-42
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting)
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a
plain paper, specify the media type.
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the
available media types are as shown below.
Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Coated, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Rough and
Custom 1 to 8
Item Description
Paper
Size
Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the
paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.
Standard
Sizes 1
Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II, Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio,
216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K,
16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18",
Oficio II, Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size
Entry
Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size
X (Horizontal): 5.83~17.00" (in 0.01" increments),
Y (Vertical): 3.86~11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric size
X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments),
Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments)
Media Type Selectable media types are as follows.
Plain (105g /m2 or less), Rough, Transparency,
Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond,
Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2
and more), Coated, High Quality and Custom 1~8
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8.
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on
page 9-11.
Preparation before Use
2-43
2
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /
Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting, and then
[Change] of Paper Size.
3For automatic detection of the paper size, press
[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
To select the paper size, press any of [Standard
Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size
Entry] and select the paper size.
If you have chosen [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to
enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You may
enter the size directly using the numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].
4Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
5Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
media type. Then press [OK].
Common Settings - Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1
Auto
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
A3 A4 A4 A5
A6 B4 B5 B5
Status
Cancel OK
B6 216x340mm
10/10/2010 10:10
Common Settings - Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1
X(148 - 432)
297
Auto
Status
# Keys
Y(98 - 297)
210
# Keys
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
Cancel OK
mm mm
10/10/2010 10:10
Common Settings - Media Type
Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray.
VellumPlain
PreprintedRecycled Bond
LetterheadPrepunched
Color
Custom 2Custom 1
Coated
Custom 3 Custom 4
Custom 7Custom 6Custom 5 Custom 8
Transparency Labels
Cardstock
ThickEnvelope
Status
Cancel OK
High Quality
Rough
10/10/2010 10:10
Preparation before Use
2-44
Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1Open the platen Cover or the optional document
processor.
NOTE: Before opening the document processor, be
sure that there are no originals left on the original table
or on the original eject table. Originals left on the
original table or on the original eject table may fall off
when the document processor is opened.
When placing books or magazines on the machine, do
so with the platen Cover or the optional document
processor in the open position.
Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the
middle of open-faced originals.
2Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown
and align it flush against the original size indicator
plates with the back left corner as the reference
point.
NOTE:
For details on Original Orientation, refer to
When placing originals on the platen on page 4-9.
Preparation before Use
2-45
2
Original size indicator plates
(Inch models)
(Metric models)
3Close the platen Cover or the optional document
processor.
IMPORTANT: Do not push the platen cover forcefully
when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the
platen glass.
CAUTION: Do not leave the platen cover or the
optional document processor open as there is a danger
of personal injury.
Preparation before Use
2-46
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals are scanned.
Part Names of the Document Processor
(1) Original placement indicator
(2) Top cover
(3) Original width guides
(4) Original table
(5) Original eject table
(6) Original stopper
(7) Opening handle
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.
• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets
• Transparencies such as OHP film
• Carbon paper
• Originals with very slippery surfaces
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Wet originals
• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Crumpled paper
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(6)
Document Processor Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Weight 45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2) 35 to 220 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)
Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Maximum A3 to Minimum A5
Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper,
Recycled paper, High Quality: 100 sheets
(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 66 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper,
Recycled paper, High Quality: 175 sheets
(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (157 g/m2): 89 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 116 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Preparation before Use
2-47
2
How to Load Originals
IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
1Adjust the original width guides.
2Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or
the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide
the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go. The original placement indicator will
be lit.
NOTE: For details on Original Orientation, refer to
When placing originals on the optional document
processor on page 4-9.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides
exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals
to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the
level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines
should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).
Preparation before Use
2-48
Original placement indicator
The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending
on how originals are placed.
Indications and their status are as follows.
• Green lit: Original is placed properly.
• Green blinking: Original is not placed properly.
Remove and place again.
3-1
3 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the following operations.
• Login/Logout .......................................................................................3-2
• Enter key and Quick No. Search key..................................................3-4
• Touch Panel Display ...........................................................................3-5
• Original Preview..................................................................................3-6
• Selecting Color Mode..........................................................................3-7
• Copying...............................................................................................3-8
• Sending.............................................................................................3-23
• Confirmation Screen of Destinations ................................................3-29
• Preparation for sending a document to a PC....................................3-30
• Specifying Destination ......................................................................3-40
• Using the Document Box ..................................................................3-43
• Canceling Jobs .................................................................................3-52
• Quick Setup Screen..........................................................................3-53
• Program ............................................................................................3-56
• Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ...3-58
• Using the Internet Browser ...............................................................3-59
• Using Weekly Timer..........................................................................3-61
• Checking Counter .............................................................................3-62
• Help Screen ......................................................................................3-62
Basic Operation
3-2
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the
machine.
NOTE: You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with
administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.
If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the Authentication/Logout key must be pressed when logging in.
For details, refer to the Guest Authorization Set. on page 10-12.
Login
1If the screen shown appears during operations,
press [Login User Name].
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
2Enter the login user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
3Press [Login Password].
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
4Enter the password and press [OK].
5Check the login user name and password are
correct, and press [Login].
NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the
user authentication method, either Local or Network
can be selected as the authentication type.
Login
User Name
Login
Status
Enter login user name and password.
Login
Password
abcdef
********
Login to: Local
# Keys
ID Card
Login
CancelCheck Counter
# Keys
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-3
3
Simple Login
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a
user and log in.
NOTE: If a login password is required, an input screen
will be displayed.
For details, refer to the Simple Login on page 10-17.
Logout
To logout from the machine, press the Authentication/
Logout key to return to the login user name/login
password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
• When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key.
• When the Auto Sleep function is activated.
• When the auto panel reset function is activated.
• When Auto Low Power Mode is activated.
• When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key.
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Select the user to login.
01 No.
Keyboard
Login
A
02
B
03
C
1/2
Basic Operation
3-4
Enter key and Quick No. Search key
This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. Search key on the operation panel.
Using the Enter ( ) key
The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel, such as [OK] and [Close].
The Enter symbol () is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e.g.
[OK], [Close]).
The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example. For details of the
procedure, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-3.
1In the paper selection screen, press the key for the
cassette containing the required paper size.
The Enter () symbol appears on the [OK] on the
touch panel, indicating that the Enter key performs
the same action as [OK].
2To copy using the selected paper, press the Enter
key (or [OK]).
Using the Quick No. Search ( ) key
Use the Quick No. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric
keys. For example, you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by
its program number.
The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel.
The use of the Quick No. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is
specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing, refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40.
1Press the Quick No. Search key (or [No.]) in the
basic send screen.
2In the number entry screen, use the numeric keys
to enter the speed dial number.
3If you entered a speed dial number between 1 and
3 digits long, press the Enter key (or [OK]).
The specified destination appears in the
destination list.
NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number, the
operation in step 3 can be omitted. The basic send
screen appears and the specified destination appears
in the destinations list.
Status
Cancel OK
Paper Selection
Auto
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A3
Plain
A4
Plain
Plain
A4
Add Shortcut
Copies
10/10/2010 10:10
Cassette
Paper Set.
MP Tray
MP Tray
Plain
A4
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Plain
A4
abcd@efg.com
Status
Destination Detail Address
Book
Folder Path
Entry
E-mail
Addr Entry
1/100
AAA BBB
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
0001
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
1/1
i-FAX
Addr Entry
FAX No.
Entry
WSD Scan
Place original.
Destination
DirectOn Hook
A OFFICE
B OFFICE
C OFFICE
Org./Sending
Data Format
Quick SetupDestination Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
0011
Cancel OK
(0001 - 1000)
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-5
3
Touch Panel Display
Display for Originals and Paper
The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray.
Display of keys that cannot be set
Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in
a non-selectable state.
NOTE: If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this
case, press the Reset key and try again.
If the key is still grayed out after the Reset key is pressed, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.
Normal Grayed out Hidden
In the following cases, the key is
grayed out and cannot be
selected.
• Cannot be used in
combination with a feature that
is already selected.
• Use prohibited by user control.
• [Preview] has been pressed.
(Refer to Original Preview on
page 3-6)
Cannot be used because an
option is not installed.
Example:
When a finisher is not installed,
[Staple/Punch] does not appear.
Copy Image
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
:
:
:
Program
Press Start key to start printing.
Press [Cancel] to change settings.
Cancel
A4Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
A4
Duplex Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Off
Combine
Original
position
Size/orientation of
original and paper
Paper
source
Output
tray
Remaining amount of toner
Staple
/Punch
OffOff
Combine
Staple
/Punch
OffOff
Combine
Staple
/Punch
OffOff
Combine
Basic Operation
3-6
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE: To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to Previewing Documents/Checking
Document Details on page 3-49.
The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.
The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below.
1Press the Copy key and place the original on the
platen.
2Press [Preview].
3The machine starts scanning the original. When
scanning is completed, the preview image appears
on the panel.
4To change the quality or the layout, press [Cancel]
or the Stop key. Change the settings and press
[Preview] again to see a preview image with the
new settings.
NOTE: If you scan a multi-page original, only the first
page is previewed.
5If there is no problem with the preview image, press
the Start key. Copying begins.
Copy Image
Preview
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
Place original.
Program
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copy Image
Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Off
Combine
Copy Image
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
:
:
:
Program
Press Start key to start printing.
Press [Cancel] to change settings.
Cancel
A4Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
A4
Duplex Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Off
Combine
Basic Operation
3-7
3
Selecting Color Mode
When you scan and then copy, send or store documents, you can select the color mode used for scanning from
the operation panel.
The basic procedure for selecting the color mode is explained below, using an example in which the scanned
document is copied.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black
& White key to select the color mode.
4Specify the required settings for copying.
5Press the Start key.
NOTE: You can fine-tune the color mode from the
touch panel.
• Copying: You can use Single Color copying
in Cyan, Green, etc. (page 4-34).
• Sending/Storing: You can select Auto Color (Color/
Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W),
Full Color or Grayscale (page 6-
23).
You can also change the default color mode for copying
and sending/storing. For details, refer to Color Selection
(Copy) on page 9-19 or Color Selection (Send/
Store) on page 9-19.
Automatically recognizes whether scanned
documents are color or black & white.
Scans all documents in full color.
Scans all documents in black & white.
Basic Operation
3-8
Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
1Press the Copy key.
NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off, press the
Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the
machine to warm up.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the optional
document processor.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading
Originals on page 2-44.
3Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on
the touch panel. Paper that matches the size of the
original will be selected automatically.
To change the paper size, press, [Org./Paper/
Finishing], [Paper Selection] and select the desired
paper source.
4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
Specify the desired number up to 999.
5Press the Start key to start copying.
Copy Image
Preview
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
Place original.
Program
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copy Image
Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Off
Combine
Basic Operation
3-9
3
Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.
You can adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Set the original on the platen and press [Color/
Image Quality] -> [Density].
4Adjust density pressing [-3] (Lighter) to [+3]
(Darker). You can change the density level [-3]
(Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Status
Copies
Add Shortcut Cancel OK
Darker
Density
Normal
Lighter
-3 -2 -1 0+1 +3+2
-2.5 -1.5 -0.5 +0.5 +1.5 +2.5
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Basic Operation
3-10
Original Image
Select image quality suited to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Set the original on the platen and press [Color/
Image Quality] -> [Original Image].
4Select Original Type.
NOTE: When the Highlighter checkbox is selected
and a fluorescent pen is copied, this can be used to
prevent the color reproduction of the fluorescent pen
from becoming too faint.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Image Quality Option Description
Original Image Original Type
Text+Photo*,**
*Highlighter can be selected.
** If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
Printer Output For mixed text and photo documents
printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine For mixed text and photos printed in a
magazine, etc.
Photo
Printer Output For photos printed on this machine
originally.
Book/Magazine For photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo Paper Suitable for photographs taken with a
camera.
Text*
Off
(original type not set)
For documents that are mostly text and
were originally printed on this machine.
On
(original type is set)
Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Graphic/Map*
Printer Output For maps and diagrams printed on this
machine originally.
Book/Magazine For maps and diagrams printed in a
magazine.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Original Image
Text
Original Type
Photo
Text+Photo
Add Shortcut
Graphic
/Map
Book
/Magazine
10/10/2010 10:10
Printer Output
Highlighter
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Basic Operation
3-11
3
Zoom
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.
Auto Zoom
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Manual Zoom
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
Preset Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
The following magnifications are available.
Letter-R
Ledger: 129 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A3: 141 %
A5: 70 %
A4
25 %
400 %
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Inch Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >>
Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >>
Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >>
Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >>
Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.)
Metric Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >>
A3), 106% (11×15" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4),
75% (11×15" >> A4),
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Metric Models (Asia
Pacific)
100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4,
A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86%
(A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >>
A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25%
(Min.)
Basic Operation
3-12
XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications
individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/
Edit] -> [Zoom].
4Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom.
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
magnification as desired. You can also enter the
magnification directly using the numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].
When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired
magnification.
When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
You can also enter the magnification directly using
the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].
Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Y
X
Status
Cancel OK
Zoom
Add Shortcut
(25 - 400)
Standard
Zoom
XY Zoom
122%
400%
100%
Auto
200%
115%
141%
# Keys
50%
86%
81%
25%
70%
A4>>B4
A5>>B5
Max.
A5>>A3
B4>>A3
B5>>A4
A4>>A3
A5>>A4
A3>>B4
A4>>B5
81%
Min.
A3>>A4
A4>>A5
Copies
%
400
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Zoom
Add Shortcut
X
Standard
Zoom
XY Zoom
%
(25 - 400)
Y(25 - 400)
%
# Keys
# Keys
Original
Orientation
100
100
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Basic Operation
3-13
3
Duplex
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
last copy will be blank.
The following binding options are available.
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
the second sides are not rotated.
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound
on the top edge, facing the same orientation when
turning the pages.
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
individual sheets. The optional document processor is
required.
The following binding options are available.
•Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides
are not rotated.
•Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The optional document processor is required.
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to
Two-sided are A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Statement-
R, Oficio II, 216×340mm and Folio.
Original Copy
5
4
3
2
1
5
3
4
1
2
ghi
def
abc
ghi
abc
def
ghi
abc
def
Original Copy
AB
2
1
1
2
Original Copy
Original Copy
5
3
4
1
2
5
3
4
1
2
Basic Operation
3-14
Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book
original.
The following binding options are available.
•Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are
copied from left to right.
•Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are
copied from right to left.
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to One-
sided. Original: A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Letter-R and 8K. Paper: A4, B5, Letter and 16K. You
may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to
match that size.
Book to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from an open book original
with facing pages.
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original: A3,
B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K. Paper:
A4, B5 and Letter.
The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].
4Select the desired Duplex option.
5If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or
[2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
finished copies of Finishing.
If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2-
sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the
setting for duplex.
2
1
21
Original Copy
3
4
3
4
34
21
21
43
1
2
1
2
1
0
2
3
21
3
0
Original Copy
Facing pages
-> Two-sided
Facing pages
-> Facing pages
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Duplex
Add Shortcut
Book
>>2-sided
1-sided
>>2-sided
Original
Orientation
1-sided
>>1-sided
2-sided
>>2-sided
Finishing
Binding
Left/Right
Binding
Top
2-sided
>>1-sided
Book
>>1-sided
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Basic Operation
3-15
3
6If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided],
[2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or
[Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
originals of Original.
7Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
8Press [OK].
9Press the Start key.
Once an original placed on the platen is scanned,
replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start
key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
Collate/Offset
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.
You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below.
Collate
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
copies as required according to page number.
Offset
Without Document Finisher
If the optional document finisher is not installed, when
you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after
rotating each set (or page) by 90º.
NOTE: To use sorting, the same size of paper as the
selected paper tray must be loaded in a different
orientation in a different paper tray. The paper sizes
supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Duplex
Add Shortcut
Book
>>2-sided
1-sided
>>2-sided
Original
Orientation
1-sided
>>1-sided
2-sided
>>2-sided
Original
Binding
Left/Right
Binding
Top
2-sided
>>1-sided
Book
>>1-sided
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Original Copy
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Original Copy (each set)
Basic Operation
3-16
With Document Finisher
When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated
after each set of copies (or after each page).
NOTE: The optional document finisher is required.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A3, B4, A4,
B5, Letter, Legal, Ledger, Oficio II, 8k, 16k,
216×340mm, Folio.
The procedure for using collate/offset copying is
explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/
Offset].
4To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate.
To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset.
Press [OK].
If [Off] is selected for Collate, press [Off] or [Each
Page] of Offset.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
3
2
13
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Original Copy (each set)
Off Each Set
Off On
Collate/Offset
Offset
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Collate
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Off Each Page
Off On
Collate/Offset
Offset
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Collate
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Basic Operation
3-17
3
Reserve Next
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned
while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure
differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 9-43).
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On]
The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
1Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
2Press the Start key.
The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off]
The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
1Press [Reserve Next].
The default screen for copying appears.
2Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
3Press the Start key.
The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.
Copy Image
Preview
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
Place original.
Program
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copy Image
Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Off
Combine
Cancel Reserve Next
Status
Copies
Scanner Setting
Copies
Printer Setting
Collate
Tray A
Top Edge on Top
100%
Scanned Pages
Job No.: Job Name: User Name:000021 doc20081010101034 -----
2-sided
2-sided
PlainA4A4
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-18
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE: If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically
canceled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay
as required. For more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 9-78.
1Press the Interrupt key.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt
copy, and configure the copy settings.
3Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.
4When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt
key.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
Copy Image
Preview
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
Place original.
Program
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copy Image
Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Off
Combine
Basic Operation
3-19
3
Staple
Use this feature to staple your finished copies.
NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling)
requires the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to 1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on
page Appendix-28 or 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-29.
The following stapling options and orientations are available.
NOTE: B5-R and 16K-R "one staple" is not diagonal.
Original Orientation:
Top Edge (Back Edge)
Original Orientation:
Top Edge (Back Edge)
Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top
corner)
Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top
corner)
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Basic Operation
3-20
Follow the steps as below for stapling.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
NOTE: When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to
Mixed Size Originals on page 4-6.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/
Punch].
4Select the staple position.
NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Saddle Stitch].
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover
page at the bottom. For more information on saddle
stitching, refer to Booklet on page 4-20.
5Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Mixed Size Stapling
Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width or same length as shown in the combinations
below, the output can be stapled. The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30.
• A3 and A4
• B4 and B5
• Ledger and Letter
• Ledger and Letter-R
• 8K and 16K
Staple/Punch
Top
Right
Staple Top
Left
2 staples
Top
2 staples
Right
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
Punch
Off
Off
Saddle
Stitch
2 staples
Left
2 holes
Top
2 holes
Left
3 holes
Left
3 holes
Top
3 holes
Right
2 holes
Right
100%
A4
A4
:
:
:
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
10/10/2010 10:10
A3A4
B4B5
LedgerLetter
B5
LedgerLetter
A3A4
B4
LegalLetter-R
LegalLetter-R
Basic Operation
3-21
3
Punch
Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding.
NOTE: Requires the optional document finisher and punching unit.
For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to Hole Punch Unit (Option) on page Appendix-29.
The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows.
NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and
four-hole punching.
Original Copy
Document
processor
Platen
Orientation of Original
Basic Operation
3-22
Follow the steps as below for punching.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing]and then press
[Staple/Punch].
4Select the type of hole punching.
5Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key.
If the original is placed on the platen. Place the next
original and press the Start key. Copying begins.
If all original pages have been scanned, press
[Finish Scan]. Copying begins.
Staple/Punch
Top
Right
Staple Top
Left
2 staples
Top
2 staples
Right
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
Punch
Off
Off
Saddle
Stitch
2 staples
Left
2 holes
Top
2 holes
Left
3 holes
Left
3 holes
Top
3 holes
Right
2 holes
Right
100%
A4
A4
:
:
:
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-23
3
Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the
network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.
To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:
• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.
• Use Command Center RX (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the
SMTP server, the recipient, and Settings for E-mail.
• Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.
• When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. To set up the PC
Folder, contact your administrator.
• Create/Register a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination)
• Select detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the
image at the same time)
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following five options are available.
• Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-24
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-25
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-25
• Send to Document Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine...page 7-7
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application
program...Refer to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-42.
The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details about this function, refer
to the FAX Operation Guide.
Basic Operation
3-24
Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry)
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
NOTE: Access the Command Center RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For
details, see Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24.
1Press the Send key.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail
Address].
NOTE: Destinations can be specified using the
Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
4Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK].
5Press [Next Dest.] and repeat step 3 to specify the
destination. Up to 100 e-mail addresses can be
specified.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the
destinations are registered in the Address Book.
6Press [OK]. The destinations are registered in the
destination list.
7Check the destination list.
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
and edit it.
Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
the destination from the list.
E-mail
Address
Add a new e-mail destination.
Press [E-mail Address], then enter
the address using the keyboard screen.
Status
E-mail Address Entry
Enter Destination.
Destination
Cancel OKNext Dest.Add to Addr Book
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Destination Detail
ABCD abcd@efg.com
Address
Book
Folder Path
Entry
E-mail
Addr Entry
No.
1/100
AAA BBB CCC DDD
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
00040003 00050001 0002
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
1/1
i-FAX
Addr Entry
FAX No.
Entry
WSD Scan
Destination
TUVW 192.168.188.120
Group1 Group1
EEE
Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook
Org./Sending
Data Format
Quick SetupDestination Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-25
3
NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 9-45), the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same destination again and press
[OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 9-44), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-29.
8Press the Start key. Sending begins.
Send to Folder (Folder Path Entry)
Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.
Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
NOTE:
• Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 3-32 for details on how to share a folder.
• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Command Center RX is On. For details, refer to the Command
Center RX Operation Guide.
1Press the Send key.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP].
NOTE: Destinations can be specified using the
Address Book or the One Touch Keys. For details, refer
to Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
Basic Operation
3-26
4Enter host name, path, login user name and login
password. Press the key of each item to first
display the entry screen.
To search for a folder on a PC on the network,
press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network].
If you pressed [Search SMB Host], you can enter
the Domain/Workgroup, and Host Name to search
PCs on the network for the destination.
If you pressed [Windows Network], you can search
all PCs on the network for a destination.
If you pressed [Windows Network], all PCs on the
network are searched. A maximum of 500
addresses can be displayed. Select the host name
(PC name) that you want to specify in the screen
that appears, and press [Next]. The login user
name and login password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login
password name of the destination PC, the shared
folders appear. Select the folder that you want to
specify and press [Next]. The address of the
selected shared folder is set.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the
computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
Select the folder from the Search Results list, and
go to step 6.
5Enter the destination data and press [OK].
Status
Connection
Test
Host Name
Path
Login
User Name
Login
Password
SMB
FTP
Folder Path Entry
Enter Destination.
Destination
Cancel OKNext Dest.Add to Addr Book
Windows
Network
Search
SMB Host
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ ˜
QWE R T Y U I O P { }
ASDFGHJKL : "
ZXCVBNM<> ?
|
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
0
128
Basic Operation
3-27
3
Data to be entered are as follows.
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your
administrator and check your login user name or login password.
For send to folder (SMB)
For send to folder (FTP)
6Upon completion of all entries, press [Connection
Test] to check the connection.
NOTE: Connected. appears when connection to the
destination is correctly established. If Cannot connect.
appears, review the entry.
To specify another destination, go to step 7. To
specify only one destination, go to step 8.
Item Data to be entered Max. characters
Host Name*
* To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format “host name: port number”
(e.g., SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data. Up to 64 characters
Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows.
For example, User\ScanData.
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name User name to access the PC
For example, abcdnet\james.smith
Up to 64 characters
Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters
Item Data to be entered Max. characters
Host Name*
* To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name: port number”
(e.g., FTPhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters
Path Path to the receiving folder.
For example, User\ScanData.
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters
Status
Connection
Test
Host Name
Path
Login
User Name
Login
Password
SMB
FTP
Folder Path Entry
Enter Destination.
Destination
Cancel OKNext Dest.Add to Addr Book
Windows
Network
Search
SMB Host
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-28
7Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 4 to 6 to
specify the destination. You can specify a
combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB
destination folders.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the
entry is registered in the Address Book.
8
Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination
list.
9Check the destination list.
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
and edit it. Edit it, if necessary, referring to steps 4
to 6.
Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
the destination from the list.
NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 9-45), the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same host name and path again,
and press [OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 9-44), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-29.
10
Press the Start key. Sending begins.
Status
Destination Detail
ABCD abcd@efg.com
Address
Book
Folder Path
Entry
E-mail
Addr Entry
No.
1/100
AAA BBB CCC DDD
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
00040003 00050001 0002
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
1/1
i-FAX
Addr Entry
FAX No.
Entry
WSD Scan
Destination
TUVW 192.168.188.120
Group1 Group1
EEE
Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook
Org./Sending
Data Format
Quick SetupDestination Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-29
3
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 9-44), the confirmation screen of destinations
appears after pressing the Start key.
Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.
1Press [ ] or [ ] to confirm every destination.
Press [Detail] to display the detailed information on
the selected destination.
To delete the destination, select the destination you
want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen. The destination is deleted.
To add the destination, press [Cancel] and then
return to the destination screen.
2Press [Check].
NOTE: Be sure to confirm every destination by
displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot press
[Check] unless you have confirmed every destination.
3Press the Start key to start sending.
Check
Cancel
Status
Destination
Detail
Delete
Destination Detail
A OFFICE 1234567890
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-30
Preparation for sending a document to a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in
other versions of Windows.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking what to enter for [Host Name]
Check the name of the destination computer.
1From the Start menu, select Computer and then
System Properties.
Check the computer name in the window that
appears.
In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select
Properties. The System Properties dialog box
appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the
window that appears and check the computer
name.
If there is a workgroup
All characters appearing in "Full computer name"
should be entered in Host Name. (Example:
PC4050)
If there is a domain
The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full
computer name" should be entered in Host Name.
Example: pc4050)
2After checking the computer name, click the [ X ]
(Close) button to close the System Properties
screen.
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name,
click the Cancel button to close the System
Properties screen.
Basic Operation
3-31
3
Checking what to enter for [Login User Name]
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1From the Start menu, select All Programs (or
Programs), Accessories and then Command
Prompt.
The Command Prompt window appears.
2At the Command Prompt, enter "net config
workstation" and then click Enter.
Screen example: user name "james.smith" and
domain name "ABCDNET"
Basic Operation
3-32
Creating a Shared Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a
specific user or group.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and then Folder Options.
In Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools.
2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced
settings.
In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing
(Recommended) in Advanced settings.
3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen.
1Create a folder on the local disk (C).
NOTE: For example, create a folder with the name
"scannerdata" on the local disk (C).
2Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share
and Advanced sharing. Click the Advanced
Sharing button.
The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears.
In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder
and select Sharing and Security... (or Sharing).
Basic Operation
3-33
3
3Select the Share this folder checkbox and click
the Permissions button.
The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box
appears.
In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click
the Permissions button.
4Click the Add button.
5Enter the user name in the text box and click the
OK button.
Click the location button and select the location. To
select the area to be searched, select a location. If
you are in a domain, your domain is selected by
default as the area to be searched.
Basic Operation
3-34
6Select the entered user, select the Change and
Read permissions, and click the OK button.
In Windows XP, go to step 8.
NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is
recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.
7Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing
screen to close the screen.
8Click the Security tab and then click the Edit
button.
In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then click
the Add button.
9Select the entered user, make sure that
checkmarks appear in allow Modify and allow
Read & execute, and click the close button.
Basic Operation
3-35
3
Checking the [Path]
Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document.
1Enter "\\pc4050" in "Program and File Search" in
the Start menu.
The Search Results screen opens.
In Windows XP, click Search in the Start menu,
select All files and folders, and search for the
destination computer to which the file will be sent.
In Search Companion, click Computers or people
and then A computer on the network.
In the "Computer name:" text box, enter the name
of the computer that you checked (pc4050) and
then click Search.
2Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the
search results.
In Windows XP, double-click the computer
("pc4050") that appears in the search results.
3Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the
search results.
Check the address bar. The third and following text
strings ( f ) should be entered for the path.
In Windows XP, double-click the scannerdata folder
and check the address bar. The text string to the
right of the third backslash (\) should be entered in
Path.
(Example: scannerdata)
NOTE: You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent. In this
case, "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for the Path. In the example
windowabove, "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path.
Basic Operation
3-36
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking file and printer sharing
1From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Allow a program
through Windows Firewall.
NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2Click Change settings, select the File and Printer
Sharing checkbox, and click OK.
Basic Operation
3-37
3
Adding a port
1From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Check firewall status.
2Click Advanced settings.
3Click Inbound Rules.
4Click New Rule.
5Select Port and click Next.
Basic Operation
3-38
6Select TCP, select Specific local ports, enter
"139", and click Next.
7Select Allow the connection and click Next.
8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click
Next.
Basic Operation
3-39
3
9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.
NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista, follow the procedure below to set the port.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security (or Security Center), and then Check
Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall).
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button.
3Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port. Enter "139" in
"Port Number". Select TCP for "Protocol".
4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.
Basic Operation
3-40
Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.
NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key.
For details, refer to Default Screen on page 9-46.
When the optional fax kit has been installed, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party’s number
using the numeric keypad.
Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to Edit Destination (Address
Book/Adding One Touch Keys) on page 9-79.
1In the basic screen for sending, press [Address
Book].
2
Press the checkbox to select the desired
destination from the list. You may choose multiple
destinations. The selected destinations are
indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use
an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext
Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down menu.
You can change the order in which the destinations
are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from the Sort
pull-down menu.
NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the check box
and remove the checkmark. For details on the external
address book, refer to Command Center RX Operation
Guide.
3Press [OK] to register the selected destination in
the destination list.
NOTE: To delete a destination in the list, select the
destination and press [Delete].
To change the default setting for Sort, refer to Sort on
page 9-85.
Status
Destination Detail
ABCD abcd@efg.com
Address
Book
Folder Path
Entry
E-mail
Addr Entry
No.
1/100
AAA BBB CCC DDD
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
00040003 00050001 0002
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
1/1
i-FAX
Addr Entry
FAX No.
Entry
WSD Scan
Destination
TUVW 192.168.188.120
Group1 Group1
EEE
Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook
Org./Sending
Data Format
Quick SetupDestination Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Address Book
Cancel OK
Group
E-mail
Dest.
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
No. Type Name Detail
Folder
Detail
Address Book SortAddr Book
0001
0002
0005
0004
0003
ABCD abcd@efg.com
TUVW tuvw@xyz.com
Group1
Group2
Group3
Name
Register/Edit
Address Book
1/2
i-FAXFAX
ABC DEF JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZGHI 0-9
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-41
3
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.
Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available.
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.
Search by name
Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name.
Search by address number
Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search.
Advanced search by initial letter
Press the key for the required initial letter.
Advanced search by destination
Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX], [i-FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are displayed.
Status
Address Book
Cancel OK
Group
E-mail
Dest.
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
No. Type Name Detail
Folder
Detail
Address Book SortAddr Book
0001
0002
0005
0004
0003
ABCD abcd@efg.com
TUVW tuvw@xyz.com
Group1
Group2
Group3
Name
Register/Edit
Address Book
1/2
i-FAXFAX
ABC DEF JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZGHI 0-9
10/10/2010 10:10
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Keys
used Search type Subjects searched
1 Search by name Search by registered name.
2 Search by address
number Search by registered address number.
3 Advanced search
by initial letter Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.
4 Advanced search
by destination Advanced search by type of registered destination
(E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).
(FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed.i-FAX:
Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed).
You can set this function up so that destination types
are selected when the address book is displayed.
For more information, refer to Narrow Down on page 9-
85.
Basic Operation
3-42
One Touch Key
Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch
Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired
destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or
[ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch
Keys.
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have
already been registered.
Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One
Touch Key) on page 9-83 for more information on
adding One Touch keys.
Speed Dial
Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to
1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
In the basic screen for sending, press the Quick No.
Search key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter
the One Touch key number in the numeric entry
screen.
NOTE: if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit,
press [OK].
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional).
This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100
Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 10 SMB and FTP
FAX : Up to 500
i-FAX : Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to start transmission to all
destinations at one time.
NOTE: If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
Status
Destination Detail
ABCD abcd@efg.com
Address
Book
Folder Path
Entry
E-mail
Addr Entry
No.
1/100
AAA BBB CCC DDD
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
00040003 00050001 0002
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
1/1
i-FAX
Addr Entry
FAX No.
Entry
WSD Scan
Destination
TUVW 192.168.188.120
Group1 Group1
EEE
Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook
Org./Sending
Data Format
Quick SetupDestination Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Destination Detail
ABCD abcd@efg.com
Address
Book
Folder Path
Entry
E-mail
Addr Entry
No.
1/100
AAA BBB CCC DDD
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
00040003 00050001 0002
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
1/1
i-FAX
Addr Entry
FAX No.
Entry
WSD Scan
Destination
TUVW 192.168.188.120
Group1 Group1
EEE
Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook
Org./Sending
Data Format
Quick SetupDestination Color/
Image Quality
Advanced
Setup
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-43
3
Using the Document Box
What is Document Box?
Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among
multiple users.
Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions.
Custom Box...page 7-2
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval.
You can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:
• Creating a box...page 7-2
• Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 7-4
• Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 7-5
• Sending a Document from a Custom Box...page 7-7
• Moving/ Copying /Joining Documents in a Custom Box...page 7-10
• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 7-13
Job Box
Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job,
Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later.
Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box. These
Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For
details, refer to Deletion of Job Retention on page 7-19.
Private Print/Stored Job Box...page 7-14
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When
sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is
released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job.
The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the main power switch is turned off.
In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is
required. In this event, you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in the
hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 7-15
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing
a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional
copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to
32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will
be overwritten by the latest document data.
Basic Operation
3-44
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the
remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy
to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use
the operation panel. You can change the number of copies to print.
Repeat Copy Box...page 7-18
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional
copies later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, the original data will be
deleted.
NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
Form for Form Overlay Box...page 7-20
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store
the forms or images for overlaying.
Removable Memory Box
A USB memory inserted into the USB Port (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. This allows
printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory. You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory
without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF, TIFF,
JPEG, XPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
Fax Box
Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit.
Basic Operation
3-45
3
Basic Operation for Document Box
This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with
custom boxes.
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-50.
The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key.
The default document box screen appears.
2
Press [Custom Box], [Job Box] or [Removable
Memory] to select the type of document box you
want to work with.
In this example, press [Custom Box].
The box list screen appears.
You can use this screen for tasks such as
registering and editing boxes. For more information
on using the box list, refer to Custom Box List on
page 3-46.
NOTE: For more information on registering boxes,
refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on
page 7-2.
You cannot access boxes if you forget your password.
In this event, access the machine using administrator
privileges and overwrite your box password.
Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5
for the default login user name and password.
3
Select the box containing the document you want
to work with and press [Open].
The document list screen appears.
You can use this screen for tasks such as printing
and sending documents. For more information on
using the document list, refer to Document List on
page 3-47.
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
No. Name Owner Used
Add/Edit Box
1/1
0001 SALES Anonymous - - - -
Store File Detail Open
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
Status
FAX Box
Search(No.)
Search(Name)
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
No. Name Owner Used
Add/Edit Box
1/1
0001 SALES Anonymous - - - -
Store File Detail Open
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
Status
FAX Box
Search(No.)
Search(Name)
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-46
Custom Box List
The box list shows the registered custom boxes. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.
You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.
No. Name Owner Used
Add/Edit Box
1/1
0001 SALES Anonymous - - - -
Store File Detail Open
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
Status
FAX Box
Search(No.)
Search(Name)
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Listing the boxes by number in
ascending/descending order.
Listing the boxes by name in
alphabetical order.
Registers new boxes and
checks, modifies or
deletes box information.
Opens the selected box.
Displays the details for
the selected box.
Saves the document
in the selected box.
Listing the boxes by owner in
alphabetical order.
A box can be searched for
by Box Name.
A box can be searched for
by Box No.
Basic Operation
3-47
3
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name
or as thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List
Thumbnail
NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note
that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Selecting more than one
document at a time.
Listing the documents by time of update in
ascending/descending order.
Listing the documents by size in
ascending/descending order.
Listing the documents by name
in alphabetical order.
Previews the selected
document.
Highlighting a document to
display its details with [Detail].
Selecting documents by
checking checkboxes.
Box:
Detail
1/1
2008101010575...
Join Move/Copy Delete
Close
2008101010575...
SendPrint Store File
2008101010575...
SALES
Preview
Status
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Selecting more than one
document at a time.
Highlighting a document
to display its details with
[Detail].
Prints, sends, joins, moves,
copies or deletes the
selected documents.
Saves the document in the
open box.
Selecting documents by
checking checkboxes.
Switches between list display
and thumbnail display.
Basic Operation
3-48
Viewing/Editing Box Details
You can check and modify box information.
Use the procedure below.
1Press [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.
2
Highlight the box whose details you wish to check
or edit and press [Detail/Edit].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3
Check the box details.
To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you
wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and press
[OK].
4
If you have changed the details, press [Save] and
then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
If you did not change the details, press [No].
5
Press [Close]. The display returns to the default
Document Box screen.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Add/Edit Box
No. Name Owner Used
0001 SALES Anonymous ----
1/1 Add
Detail/Edit Delete
Close
Status
Search(Name)
Search(No.)
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Box:
Box No.:
Box Name: Usage Restriction:
Change
Change Change
0001
SALES
Auto File Deletion: Change
Cancel Save
Free Space:
Overwrite Setting: Change
200
30
MB
Permit
GB
30
Box Password: Change
********
Delete after Printed: Change
Off
123456
day(s)
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-49
3
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details
You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details
for checking.
Use the procedure below.
1Select (highlight) a document to preview and then
press [Preview] or [Detail].
2
Preview the document or check the document
details.
The operations available in the preview screen are
shown below.
3
When you have finished previewing documents or
checking document details, press [Close].
Close
Preview:
No.
1/6
2007040410574501
Status
Size
Resol.
Color
:
:
: Full Color
300x300dpi
A4
10/10/2010 10:10
When you have zoomed in, you can use these keys to move
the displayed area.
In multiple-page documents,
you can change pages by
entering the desired page
number.
In multiple-page documents,
you can use these buttons to
change pages.
Zoom in.Zoom out.
Basic Operation
3-50
User Privileges
When user login administration is enabled, accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending
on the given user privilege.
Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows:
Restricting the Accessibility to a Box
The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows:
Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes.
User: A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes.
Access level
Accessibility Administrator User
Operation
Creating a box Yes No
Changing box owner Yes No
Deleting a box Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Box information
Changing box
number
Others Yes No
Owner Yes No
Renaming a box Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Changing the
password to a box
Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Adjusting the box
capacity
Others Yes No
Owner Yes No
Changing the owner Others Yes No
Owner Yes No
Changing the
permission
Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Changing the
period of using a
box
Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Basic Operation
3-51
3
Password Entry Requirement
When user login administration is enabled, requirement of a password differs depending on the level of
privileges as follows:
Administrator: The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access
to any box.
User: The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box
which is protected by a password. The user is not required to enter a
password to gain access to his/her own boxes.
Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled
If you create a new Custom Box when user login
administration is enabled, the screen appears and you
can change the owner and permission settings. Only
administrators and machine administrators can create
new Custom Boxes.
Changing the owner: Press [Change] of Owner and
select the new owner for the
box from the displayed list.
Then press [OK].
Changing the permission:Press [Change] of
Permission and select either
[Private] or [Shared]. Then
press [OK].
NOTE: For information on specifying other settings,
refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on
page 7-2.
Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled
When user login administration is enabled, the owner of
a box with user privileges set can change the following
box information: the box name, the box password, the
permission, the auto file deletion and the overwrite
setting.
Status
Save
Change
Box:
Box No.: Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Owner:
Box Name:
Box Password: Permission:
Usage Restriction:
Auto File Deletion:
Free Space:
0001 DCBA9876
SALES
********** Private
Cancel
Change
Overwrite Setting:
Permit
200 MB
MB30
day(s)30
Delete after Printed: Change
Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Box:
Box No.:
Box Name:
Box Password:
Usage Restriction:
Change
0001
SALES
********
Auto File Deletion: Change
Cancel Save
Owner:
Permission: Change
DCBA9876
Change
Free Space:
Overwrite Setting: Change
Private
200
30
MB
Permit
MB
30
Delete after Printed: Change
Off
day(s)
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-52
Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.
Printing jobs
1Press the Stop key with the copy screen or send
screen displayed.
Cancelling job screen appears.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2Select the job you wish to cancel and press
[Cancel]. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation
screen.
Sending jobs
1Press the Stop key with the copy screen or send
screen displayed.
Job Cancel appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop
a job that you have already started sending.
2To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press
[Yes] in the confirmation screen.
NOTE:
If Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 9-43) is set to
[Off]
The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during
printing.
1Press the Stop key or [Cancel].
The current print job is canceled.
Canceling printing from a computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on
the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows
desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing
and select Cancel from the Document menu.
Cancel Reserve Next
Status
Copies
Scanner Setting
Copies
Printer Setting
Collate
Tray A
Top Edge on Top
100%
Scanned Pages
Job No.: Job Name: User Name:000021 doc20081010101034 -----
2-sided
2-sided
PlainA4A4
10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-53
3
Quick Setup Screen
In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key
is first pressed after power-on), important and generally often used functions are registered from among the
versatile functions of this machine. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Registration of functions in
the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency.
Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen
Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows.
For details on Quick Setup Screen for FAX, refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
Function Default Registration Functions Available for
Registration
Copying 1: Paper Selection
2: Zoom
3: Density
4: Duplex
5: Combine
6: Staple/Punch
• Paper Selection
•Zoom
•Density
•Duplex
• Combine
• Staple/Punch
• Original Orientation
• Collate/Offset
• Color Selection
• Original Image
• Original Size
• Continuous Scan
• Background Density Adj.
Sending 1: Color Selection
2: Scan Resolution
3: Density
4: 2-sided/Book Original
5: Continuous Scan
6: File Format
•Zoom
• Scan Resolution
• FAX TX Resolution
•Density
• 2-sided/Book Original
• File Format
• Original Size
• Sending Size
• Original Orientation
• Original Image
• Color Selection
• Continuous Scan
• Background Density Adj.
Basic Operation
3-54
Changing Registration
The following procedure is one example for replacing
the registration of Density with Original Image in the
Quick Setup Screen for copying.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup Registration,
and then [Change] of Original Image.
Document
Box
Document
Storage
1: Color Selection
2: Resolution
3: Density
4: 2-sided/Book Original
5: Original Orientation
6: Original Image
• Color Selection
• Resolution
•Density
• 2-sided/Book Original
• Original Orientation
• Original Image
• Original Size
•Zoom
• Continuous Scan
• Storing Size
• Background Density Adj.
Sending
From Box
1: File Format
2: Delete after Transmitted
3: FAX TX Resolution
4: Sending Size
• File Format
• Delete after Transmitted
• FAX TX Resolution
• Sending Size
Printing
From Box
1: Paper Selection
2: Delete after Printed
3: Collate/Offset
4: Duplex
5: Combine
6: Staple/Punch
• Paper Selection
• Delete after Printed
• Collate/Offset
•Duplex
• Staple/Punch
• Combine
Function Default Registration Functions Available for
Registration
Copy Image
Preview
Copies
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 6
Shortcut 5
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
Place original.
Program
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copy Image
Staple
/Punch
Normal 0
DensityPaper
Selection
Auto
Zoom
100%
Off1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Off
Combine
Basic Operation
3-55
3
3Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement
location.
4Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press
[Yes]. The Original Image Quality function will be
newly registered.
Key 1
Cancel OK
Off
Key 2 Key 3
Key 4 Key 5 Key 6
Copy - Original Image
Add Original Image to the Quick Setup screen.
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-56
Program
By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number
as needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
The programs below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in
your environment.
NOTE: Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program.
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1Press the Program key while the copy mode is
accessed.
2Press [Add] and press a number (01 to 50) for the
program number.
If entering Program screen from the Copy screen,
Send screen or Document Box screen, go to step 4.
NOTE: If you select a program number already
registered, the currently registered functions can be
replaced with a new set of functions.
3Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next].
4Enter the new program name and press [Save] to
register the program.
Number Program name Default Registration
01 ID Card Copy Copying function
Color: Black & White
Combine: [2 in 1]
Continuous Scan: [On]
Original Size: Statement (A5-R)
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Zoom: Auto Zoom
02 Eco Copy Copying function
Color: Black & White
EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])
03 Confidential Stamp Copying function
Color: Black & White
Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
Stamp: Confidential
Font Size: middle
Font Color: [Black]
Stamp Position: [Center]
Display Pattern: [Transparent]
Basic Operation
3-57
3
Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.
If the Program key is pressed 1Press the Program key.
2Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to
the program number (01 to 50) to recall. Press the
Quick No. Search key or [No.] to enter the
program number directly for recalling.
If [Program] is pressed in the copy function screen
NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the
Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the
Document Box.
[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up
the program registered for the function.
3Place the originals and press the Start key.
Copying is performed according to the registered
program.
Editing and Deleting Programs
You can change program number and program name, or delete program.
Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.
1Press the Program key.
2Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to
the program number (01 to 50) to change or delete.
3To edit a program, use the procedure for registering
a program and press [Change]. Then change the
program number and program name and press
[Save]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to
change the program.
To delete the program, press [Delete this Program].
Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally
delete the program.
No.
Recall Add Edit
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Eco Copy Confidential Stamp
Send 2 FAX 1
ID Card Copy
FAX 2
Send 1
Box 1
01 02 03 04
05 07 0806
09 10 11 12
13 15 1614
17 19 20
18
No.
Status
Send 2 FAX 1 FAX 2
Send 1
Box 1
01 02 03 04
05 07 0806
09 10 11 12
13 15 1614
17 19 20
18
Color/
Image Quality
Org./Paper/
Finishing
Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced
Setup
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Eco Copy Confidential StampID Card Copy
Basic Operation
3-58
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked
to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions,
sending functions, and functions set for document box.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all
functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.
Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.
1After making the desired settings in the setup
screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut].
2Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut
number (01 to 06) to register.
NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already
registered, the currently registered shortcut can be
replaced with a new one.
3Enter the shortcut name and press [Save] to add
the shortcut.
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts
Follow the steps shown below to change a shortcut number/name or delete a shortcut.
1In the setup screen of each function, press [Add
Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.
2Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to
the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete.
3To edit a shortcut, press [Change] to change the
shortcut button number and name and press [OK]
and then [Save]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation
screen to change the shortcut.
To delete the shortcut, press [Delete this Shortcut].
Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete
the shortcut.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Memo Page
Add Shortcut
Off
Layout B
Original
Orientation
Layout A
Border Line
Top
R to L
Top
R to B
Top
L to B
Top
L to R
Layout
None
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
50%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Basic Operation
3-59
3
Using the Internet Browser
This section explains how to use the Internet browser.
NOTE: To use the internet browser, internet browser must be set to [On] in Internet Browser Setting on page
9-86.
Launching and Exiting the Browser
Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.
1Press the Application key.
The application list screen appears.
2Press [Internet Browser].
The Internet browser starts up.
3Use the browser screen to browse web pages.
For information on how to use the browser screen,
refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3-60.
4To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then
press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.
The application list screen reappears.
NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way
the Internet browser screen is displayed. For details,
refer to Internet (page 9-86).
Weekly Timer Internet Browser
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Basic Operation
3-60
Using the Browser Screen
The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to
the application list screen without displaying the browser exit.
Enter URL Search Menu
KYOCERA MITA
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Title bar
Displays the page title.
Search box
Pressing the text box displays a keyboard.
You can then perform a search by entering
a keyword and pressing the [Search].
Close
Closes the Internet browser and returns
you to the application list screen.
Scroll bars
These allow you to scroll the
displayed page up, down, left
and right by pressing [ ], [ ],
[ ] or [ ] or by moving one of
the slide bars with your finger.
Security lock icon
Displayed when you are viewing
a protected page.
Loader/Progress bar
Shows the status of page
loading. When the browser is
loading a web page, the loader
changes to an animated display.
Menu
Displays the browser setup menu. You can use
this menu to specify the browser's display
magnification, set the text encoding scheme
and check the server certificate.
Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page)
Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval
in page] or an Internet search site.
Search Internet: Use the selected search site to search
with the entered keyword.
Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in
the currently displayed page. You can
continue your search by pressing
[SearchUp] or [SearchDown].
Enter URL
Use this to display a desired web
page by entering the URL for
that page.
Home page
Displays your specified home page.
You can set your home page in the
Browser Preferences on page 9-86.
Reload
Updates the page.
Back/Forward
Displays the previous
page or the next page.
Basic Operation
3-61
3
Using Weekly Timer
"Weekly Timer" is installed on the machine as a standard application. Weekly Timer allows you to store machine
on/off times for each day of the week and set the machine to automatically turn on and off at those times.
IMPORTANT: On/off using Weekly Timer puts the machine in the same state (sleep) as when the power key is
pressed on the operation panel. When using Weekly Timer, do not turn off the main power switch.
NOTE: When user management is enabled, you must log in with administrator authority to use this feature.
Be sure to set the time before using Weekly Timer. For details, see Setting Date and Time on page 2-12
Setting Weekly Timer
1Press the Application key.
The application list screen appears.
2Press [Weekly Timer].
Weekly Timer starts up.
3Press the [Enable the Application] checkbox so that
a checkmark appears.
4Select the day you want to set and press [Edit].
5Press the [Enable] checkboxes for power ON/OFF
so that checkmarks appear, press [+] or [-] to enter
the times, and press [OK].
[# Keys] can be pressed to enter the time with the
numeric keys on the operation panel.
6If you need to change the number of retries made
when the power is not successfully turned off,
press [Retry Times].
7Set the Retry Times and the Retry Interval, and
press [OK].
To have retries made continuously until the
machine power turns off, press the [Continue to
Retry] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
8To close, press [End].
You will return to the application list screen.
Basic Operation
3-62
Checking Counter
Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets
printed and scanned.
For details, refer to Checking and Printing Counter on
page 10-33.
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
To show the Help screen, press the Help key on the
operation panel. The Help screen shows explanations
of functions and how to use them.
Help Screen Display
Counter
10/10/2010 10:10Status
Close
Print
Status Page
Printed Pages
Black&White:
TotalPrinterCopy
Scanned Pages
Originals:
TotalFAXCopy
1800200600
FAX
Full Color:
SingleColor:
Total:
Others
1000600300 100
800500200 100
200100100 0
20001200600 200
1000
Printed Pages
by Paper Size
Try It
Select paper source by choosing a
Cassette or MP Tray.
Selecting Paper Source
1/2
End
Setting Procedure
1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].
2. Press [Paper Selection].
Display List
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Displays information
about functions and
machine operation.
Help titles
Show the screen of the tab
that includes the function
explained in Help. (In the
case of this screen, the
screen that appears after
step 1 of Setting Procedure
is performed will appear.)
Closes the Help screen and
returns to the original
screen.
Scrolls up and down by
pressing [ ] or [ ] when
the help text cannot be
displayed in its entirety on a
single screen.
Displays the Help list.
4-1
4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.
• Original Size........................................................................................4-2
• Paper Selection...................................................................................4-3
• Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................4-6
• Original Orientation.............................................................................4-9
• Fold...................................................................................................4-11
• Paper Output.....................................................................................4-13
• Combine............................................................................................4-14
• Margin/Centering ..............................................................................4-16
• Border Erase.....................................................................................4-18
• Booklet..............................................................................................4-20
• Cover ................................................................................................4-22
• Form Overlay ....................................................................................4-23
• Page #...............................................................................................4-24
• Memo Page.......................................................................................4-26
• Poster................................................................................................4-28
• Image Repeat ...................................................................................4-29
• Text Stamp ........................................................................................4-31
• Bates Stamp......................................................................................4-32
• EcoPrint ............................................................................................4-34
• Single Color ......................................................................................4-34
• Color Balance ...................................................................................4-35
• Hue Adjustment ................................................................................4-36
• One-touch Image Adjust ...................................................................4-37
• Sharpness.........................................................................................4-39
• Background Density Adj....................................................................4-40
• Saturation..........................................................................................4-41
• Prevent Bleed-thru............................................................................4-42
• Continuous Scan...............................................................................4-43
• Auto Image Rotation .........................................................................4-44
• Negative Image.................................................................................4-44
• Mirror Image......................................................................................4-45
• Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................4-46
• File Name Entry ................................................................................4-48
• Priority Override................................................................................4-48
• Repeat Copy.....................................................................................4-49
• OHP Backing Sheet..........................................................................4-51
Copying Functions
4-2
Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard
sizes.
The following options are available.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original
Size].
4Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],
[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Item How to Select Sizes
Standard
Sizes 1 Have the size of original
detected automatically, or
select from the standard
sizes.
Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II and 11×15"
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio and 216×340mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select from the standard
sizes not included in the
Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R and
216×340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K and
16K-R
Others Select from envelope,
postcard or the custom sized
originals*.
* For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to
Custom Original Size on page 9-4.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Measurement on page 9-12.
Use the procedure below to select the original size.
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Size Entry Enter the size not included in
the standard sizes 1 and 2**.
Inch models
Horizontal: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments),
Vertical: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
A3
A4 A5
A4
A5
A6 B4 B5
B5
Auto
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
Original Size
Copies
Status
Cancel OK
Add Shortcut
B6 B6
216x340mm
100%
A4
A4
:
:
:
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-3
4
If [Size Entry] is selected, press [+] or [-] to specify
the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y).
Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the
numeric keys.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 9-4).
Selecting the Cassette
Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper
Selection].
4Press the key of the paper source corresponding to
the required paper size. The cassette in which the
paper is loaded is selected.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of
the original is selected automatically.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Original Size
X
Y
(50 - 432)
# Keys
# Keys
mm
mm
297
210
(50 - 297)
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
210x297m
m
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Status
Cancel OK
Paper Selection
Auto
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A3
Plain
A4
Plain
Plain
A4
Add Shortcut
Copies
10/10/2010 10:10
Cassette
Paper Set.
MP Tray
MP Tray
Plain
A4
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Plain
A4
Copying Functions
4-4
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray
Change the paper size and media type.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 9-7).
Category Item How to
Select Sizes
Paper
Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Choose from
the standard
size.
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Oficio II and Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio and 216×340mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Choose from
the standard
sizes not
included in
the Standard
Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R and
216×340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Oficio II, Executive, 8K, 16K and
16K-R
Others Choose from
non-standard
sizes and
custom
sizes.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and
Custom 1 to 4*
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to
Custom Paper Size on page 9-5.
Size
Entry
Enter the
size not
included in
the standard
sizes 1 and
2**.
Inch models
Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),
Vertical: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media
Type
Plain (105 g/m
2
or less), Transparency, Rough,
Vellum (
60 to 105
g/m
2
or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond,
Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m
2
or more), Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Measurement on page 9-12.
*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Media Type
Setting on page 9-8.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper
Action on page 9-11.
Copying Functions
4-5
4
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection]
and then [Media Type].
4Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],
[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.
If you select [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to specify
X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You can enter
the size directly using the numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].
5Press [Media Type].
6Select paper type, and press [OK].
7
Press [OK].
8Press [OK].
9Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.
10
If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the
paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a
confirmation screen appears. When [Auto] is used
and the same size of paper as the detected original
size is not loaded, a paper confirmation screen
appears.
Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray
and press [Continue] to start copying.
Paper Selection - Paper Settings
A3
A5
B5
A4
A6
B5
A4
B4
Copies
Status
Cancel OK
Others
Size Entry
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Plain
Media Type
B6
216x340mm
10/10/2010 10:10
Others
Size Entry
Plain
Media Type
X
(98 - 297)Y
mm
# Keys
(148 - 432)
mm
# Keys
297
210
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Copies
Status
Cancel OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Paper Selection - Paper Settings
Copying Functions
4-6
Mixed Size Originals
Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied. In
this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Supported Combinations of Originals
Originals of the Same Width
The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
B4 and B5
Ledger
(A3)
Ledger
(A3)
Letter
(A4)
Letter
(A4)
Legal
(Folio)
Letter-R
(A4-R)
Legal
(Folio)
Letter-R
(A4-R)
Copying Functions
4-7
4
Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)
Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R, B5-R, and Folio, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio].
For more information, refer to Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) on page 9-10.
A3, B4, A4 and B5
B4, A4-R and B5
A4-R, B5-R and Folio
A4-RB4 B5 A4-R
B4B5
A4-R
B5-R
B5-RA4-R
Copying Functions
4-8
Selecting How to Copy Originals
Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to
produce all copies on the same size paper.
NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options.
Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place originals on the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different width,
arrange the originals so that their left sides and top
sides are aligned, and place the originals in alignment
with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned
in this way, they may not be scanned correctly, and
skewing or original jams may result.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size
Originals].
4Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies]
as finish size.
5Select the combination of originals from [Same
Width] and [Different Width].
When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long
Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original
orientation.
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key to start copying.
Option Description
Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and
copied to the same size paper as originals.
Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper.
Same Width
Long Edge
Left
Different
Width
Short Edge
Left
Original Width
Top Page Direction
Mixed Size Originals
Off
Mixed Size
Copies
Same Size
Copies
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-9
4
Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.
•Zoom (XY Zoom)
•Duplex
• Margin/Centering originals
• Border erase
• Combine mode
• Memo mode
• Page numbering
• Booklets
• Stapling/Punch (optional feature)
• 2-sided/Book Original
•Text Stamp
• Bates Stamp
NOTE: If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 9-16 setting in the System Menu, the
selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing originals on the platen
When placing originals on the optional document processor
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 9-17.
Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left]
Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left]
Copying Functions
4-10
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original
Orientation].
4Select [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] as
the way the original is oriented.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Original Orientation
Top Edge
on Left
Select the orientation of the
original document's top edge.
Top Edge
on Top
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-11
4
Fold
You can fold finished copies.
NOTE: Folding requires the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on
page Appendix-30.
The following folding options and orientations are available.
Orientaion: Landscape Orientaion: Portrait
Bi-Fold
Tri-Fold
Inside
R to L / B to T
L to R / T to B
Outside
R to L / B to T
L to R / T to B
Copying Functions
4-12
The procedure for using fold copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Fold].
4Select the fold method.
NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Bi-Fold] and
then [Saddle Stitch]. For more information on saddle
stitching, refer to Booklet on page 4-20.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Status
Copies
Add Shortcut Cancel OK
Fold
Off Staple
Off Saddle Stitch
10/10/2010 10:10
Tri-Fold
Bi-Fold
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-13
4
Paper Output
You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your
copies.
NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, 1,000 sheet document finisher, 4,000 sheet
document finisher, and mailbox.
The table below shows the available output destinations.
NOTE: To change the default destination for copies, refer to Paper Output on page 9-15 for details.
When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used.
Use the procedure below to select the output destination.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper
Output].
4Select the output destination for finished copies.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Destination Description
Inner tray*
* This cannot be selected when the optional document finisher is installed.
Inner tray of the machine (where copies are stored)
Finisher Left Tray
Finisher Top Tray
Tray of the optional 1,000 sheet document finisher
Tray A, Tray B, Tray C Trays A to C in the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher
Right Tray Optional right job separator
Job Separator Tray* Optional job separator
Tray 1 to 7 Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray)
Paper Output
Face Up
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Add Shortcut
Tray A Right Tray
Tray CTray B
Tray 1 Tray 3Tray 2
Tray 5
Tray 4
Tray 6
10/10/2010 10:10
Tray 7
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-14
Combine
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The
page boundary of each original can be indicated.
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 216×340mm Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals
onto one sheet.
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Original
Document processorPlaten
Orientation of OriginalCopy
Copying Functions
4-15
4
4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals
onto one sheet.
The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
Original
Document processorPlaten
Orientation of OriginalCopy
None DottedSolid Borders
(Cropmark)
Copying Functions
4-16
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine].
4Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and choose the page layout
of Layout.
5Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines
to indicate page boundaries. Press [OK].
6Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
7Press [OK].
8Press the Start key. Copying begins.
If the original is placed on the platen, replace the
original and press the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
Margin/Centering
Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side.
When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center the original image on the paper.
The following margin widths are available.
Margin on the Back Side
When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.
Auto
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin
specified for the front page and a binding orientation.
Separate Front/Back Margins
Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.
NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin Default on page 9-24 for details.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Combine
Add Shortcut
Layout
4 in 1
2 in 1 Left then
Down
Original
Orientation
Off
Border Line
Down then
Right
Down then
Left
Right then
Down
Top Edge
on Top
None
10/10/2010 10:10
50%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Input units Margin Width
Inch Models -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Copying Functions
4-17
4
Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering].
4Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin.
Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and
Top/Bottom. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric
keys for entry.
For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and select
[Auto] or [Manual].
If you selected [Auto], press [OK]. If you pressed
[Manual], enter the margins in the displayed screen
and then press [OK].
Press [Centering] to center the original image on
the paper.
5Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key to start copying.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Margin/Centering
Add Shortcut
Left/Right
Off
Margin
mm
(-18 - +18)
Top/Bottom (-18 - +18)
mm
# Keys
# Keys
Original
Orientation
Centering
Back Page
0
0
Auto
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Margin/Centering - Back Page
Add Shortcut
Left/Right
Auto
Manual
mm
(-18 - +18)
Top/Bottom (-18 - +18)
mm
# Keys
# Keys
+6
+6
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Margin/Centering
Add Shortcut
Off
Margin
Original
Orientation
Centering
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-18
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies.
The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Individual Border Erase
Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
In each option, the available ranges are as shown below.
NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to Border Erase Default on page 9-23 for
details.
Original Copy
Original Copy
Original Copy
Input units Border Erase Range
Inch Models 0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Copying Functions
4-19
4
Border Erase to Back Page
When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.
NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to Paper
Selection on page 9-41.
Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.
1Press the Copy key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].
4Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
borders for a book.
Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the
individual border erase.
Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Top, Bottom, Left
or Right. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
entry.
Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
orientation from either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Item Detail
Same as Front
Page
Border Erase performed using the same setting
as the front page
Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page
Copies
Border Erase
Border
Off
Border Erase
Sheet
mm
(0 - 50)
Gutter (0 - 50)
mm
# Keys
# Keys
Border Erase
Book
Individual
Border Erase
6
6
Status
Add Shortcut Cancel OK
Back Page
Same as
Front Page
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Border Erase
Add Shortcut
Top
Off
Border Erase
Sheet
mm
(0 - 50)
mm
# Keys
Border Erase
Book
Individual
Border Erase
Back Page
Original
Orientation
Bottom
Left
Right
mm
mm
6
6
6
6
Top Edge
on Top
Same as
Front Page
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-20
Booklet
The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures
or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi
purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 9-11.
NOTE:
Using the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your
copies (fold them in two with staples in the center). This is limited to the A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, 8K.
The supported original and paper sizes are as follows.
For binding on the left side
The folded copies can be read from left to right.
For binding on the right side
The folded copies can be read from right to left.
For top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Type of Original Original Size Paper Size
One-sided original,
Two-sided original*
* The optional document processor is required.
All**
** Except for custom sized originals.
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Letter and Letter-R
Book original A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter, Letter-R,
16K and 16K-R
Original Copy
Original Copy
Original Copy
Copying Functions
4-21
4
The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet].
4Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet
from single-sided originals.
Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet
from two-sided originals.
Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from
an open book original.
5If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or
[Book>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in
Finishing.
If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet], choose the
binding orientation in Finishing.
6If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet],
[2-sided>>Booklet], or [Book>>Booklet] you can
add the cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and
press [OK].
7Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
8If the optional 4,000 sheet document finisher and
folding unit are installed, the [Staple/Fold] option is
displayed.
To fold finished copies in half, press [Staple/Fold]
and then press [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, press [Staple/Fold] and
then press [Saddle Stitch].
NOTE: The number of sheets that can be folded or
Saddle Stitch stapled varies by paper weight. For
details, refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on page
Appendix-30.
9Press [OK].
10 Press the Start key. Copying begins.
NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the
originals in page order.
If the originals are placed on the platen,
consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Booklet
Add Shortcut
Original
2-sided
>>Booklet
1-sided
>>Booklet Binding
Top
Staple
/Fold
Original
Orientation
Off
Binding
Left/Right
Book
>>Booklet
Finishing
Cover
Binding
Right
Binding
Left
Binding
Top
Top Edge
on Top
Off
Off
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-22
Cover
Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick
paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper
for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 9-11.
The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover].
4Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
If the originals are placed on the platen,
consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
Type of Cover Description
Front Cover First page of the originals is copied on a different
paper.
Front and Back
Covers
First page and last page of the originals are
copied on different paper.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Cover
Add Shortcut
Print the cover pages using an other paper source.
Select either [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].
* Set paper source for cover in System Menu.
Front and Back
Covers
Off Front Cover
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-23
4
Form Overlay
Copy the original images onto the form. Once you scan
and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the
original. You can also use a form that is already
registered in the machine's memory.
NOTE: To register a form in advance, refer to Form for
Form Overlay on page 7-20 for details.
Follow the steps shown below for form overlay.
1Press the Copy key.
2Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay].
3Press [Scan New Form] to use the first page of
originals as a form.
NOTE: You can select the form density setting through
4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or
[-] buttons in Density.
To use the forms already registered, press [Select
Stored Form]. Press [Select Form] to display the
document boxes that store documents which can
be used as a form. Select the desired form from the
list and press [OK].
NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
4Press [OK].
5Place the originals.
Place the original for the form on top of the other
originals. When using the optional document
processor, the first page of the originals should be
placed on the top.
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Original CopyForms
Density
:30%
Density
:100%
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Form Overlay
Add Shortcut
Density
Scan
New Form
Select
Stored Form
%
Off (10 - 30, 100)
Select
Form
None
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Status
Cancel OK
Preview
1/1
Copies
Form Overlay - Select Form
Box Name
Detail
Open
Up
Document Box
Form for Form Overlay
Custom Box
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-24
Page #
Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n]. The
format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n.
Select Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering
position.
Items that can be set for the page number font are indicated below.
Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #].
Item Detail
Font Size Set the font size of the printed page number.*
* Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Style Set the font style of the printed page number. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font Set the font of the printed page number. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color Set the color of the printed page number. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed page number.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed page number.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Original [ – 1 –] [P.1] [1/n]
Copying Functions
4-25
4
4Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or
[1/n].
5Select the page numbering position.
6To start page numbering from a page other than the
first page, press [+] or [–] of 1st Page and select the
starting page. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
7To start the numbering with a number other than 1,
press [+] or [–] of Start Number and enter the
starting number. You can also enter the number
with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
8Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the page numbering.
9If you do not want page numbering through to the
last page, press [Last Page]. Select Manual and
use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered
(a negative number of pages counting backwards
from the last page). Then press [OK]. You can set a
value up to -10. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
10 The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can
be changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and
select [Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the total
number of pages and press [OK]. You can also
enter the number with the numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].
11 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Press [OK].
12
Press [OK].
13
Press the Start key to start copying.
Cancel OK
Page #
1st Page
Off
1/n
(1 - 10)
Start #
(1 - 999)
# Keys # Keys
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
P.1
Auto
Denominator
#
-1-
Auto
Last Page
22
Status
Position
Top
Middle
Top
Left
Top
Right
Bottom
Left
Bottom
Middle
Bottom
Right
Font
Add Shortcut
pt
Black
9
10/10/2010 10:10
Copies
Copying Functions
4-26
Memo Page
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space
or add lines to indicate page boundaries.
NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal,
Oficio II, 216×340mm, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto
half of a page, leaving the other half blank for notes.
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto
half of a single page, leaving the other half blank for
notes.
Original Copy
Original Copy
Copying Functions
4-27
4
Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following boundary lines are available.
Use the procedures below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page].
4Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Select the page
layout from Layout.
5Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary
line. Press [OK].
6Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left]. Press [OK].
7Press [OK].
8Press the Start key to start copying.
None DottedSolid Borders
(Cropmark)
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Memo Page
Add Shortcut
Off
Layout B
Original
Orientation
Layout A
Border Line
Top
R to L
Top
R to B
Top
L to B
Top
L to R
Layout
None
Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
50%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-28
Poster
To use this device to make copies larger than the
maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate and
copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages.
The completed copies have overlapping areas. A single
large page can be created by pasting those areas
together.
Choose one of the following 3 enlargement settings:
•Copy size – The output paper size is chosen from
the following sizes. Copy is enlarged according to
the selected paper size.
•Zoom prioirty – Specify the output zoom size from
100 to 400%. Image will be output on the necessary
number of copies for the specified zoom size.
•Number of sheets – Select number of sheets to
split the image from 2, 4, or 8 sheets. Copy is
enlarged according to the selected number.
NOTE: The available original sizes are A3, A4-R,
Ledger and Letter-R. The available paper sizes are A3
and Ledger only.
Follow the steps shown below to use poster enlargement.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Poster].
4Select an enlargement method.
If [Copy Size] is selected, set the output paper size.
If [Zoom Priority] is selected, set the output zoom
size.
If [Number of Sheets] is selected, set the number of
split pages.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Original Copy
Model Type Paper size
Inch models 34 × 44", 22 × 34", 17 × 22"
Metric models A0, A1, A2
Poster
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Off
Copy Size
Zoom
Priority
Separate and copy an image suitable for
the selected copy size.
A2A1A0
Number of
Sheets
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-29
4
Image Repeat
Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can
also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Image Repeat
Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at
a specified magnification.
You can also specify how much of the original is
repeatedly copied.
Double Copy
Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.
For example, you can double-copy an A4 original onto
an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies
that are identical to the original.
Follow the steps shown below to use Image Repeat.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat].
4Press [Zoom Priority].
To make double copies, press [Double Copy] and
proceed to step 8.
5Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size.
Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys.
6To set the area of the original to be repeated, press
[On] for Specify Repeat Area.
Original Copy
Original Copy
Image Repeat
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Off
Zoom
Priority
100
# Keys
Double
Copy
(25 - 400)
%
Off
Specify
Repeat Area
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-30
7Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the original to be
repeated.
With metric models, you can enter the border width
directly using the numeric keys after pressing [#-
Keys].
Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of
repeat area
X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left
edge of repeat area
Y2: Height of repeat area
X2: Width of repeat area
8Press [OK].
9Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Copying Functions
4-31
4
Text Stamp
When making copies, you can print a text stamp on copy output.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Printing Jobs on
page 9-31.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Use the procedures below to specify the Text Stamp settings.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Text Stamp].
4Press [On].
5Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be
printed, or select a text stamp from the displayed
templates.
NOTE: Templates that have been set will appear. For
details on registering templates, refer to System
Stamp on page 9-30.
Item Detail
Stamp
Method
Each Print
Page
Stamp on each printed page.
Each Original
Page
Stamp each page of the document.
Position Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Font Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp.*
* Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic]
can be set.
Color Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Text Stamp
Add Shortcut
Keyboard
On
Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Stamp
URGENT COPY
Stamp
Method
Position Font Original
Orientation
Each
Print Page
Top
Left
pt
Black
9 Top Edge
on Top
Copying Functions
4-32
6Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method
for the text stamp.
7Press [Position] and select the position of the text
stamp.
8Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the text stamp.
9Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
10
Press [OK].
11
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Bates Stamp
When making copies, you can print a bates stamp on the originals.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Printing Jobs on
page 9-31.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Use the procedure below to specify the Bates Stamp settings.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
Item Detail
Position Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Font Size Set the font size of the printed bates stamp.*
* Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Style Set the font style of the printed bates stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font Set the font of the printed bates stamp. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color Set the color of the printed bates stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed bates stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed bates stamp.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Copying Functions
4-33
4
3Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Bates Stamp].
4Press [On].
5Press [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number],
[Numbering], [Text 1], or [Text 2], and set additional
information to be printed in the stamp.
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change]
below it and enter the text string to be printed.
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format] and
select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/
MM/DD] to set the date format.
If you selected [Numbering], press [Numbering
Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 to
9999999).
6Press [Position] and select the position of the bates
stamp.
7Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the bates stamp.
8Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
9Press [OK].
10
Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Bates Stamp
Add Shortcut
On
Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Stamp
Date User Name
Numbering
Default
Position Font Original
Orientation
1Top Left pt
Black
9Top Edge
on Top
Numbering Text 1
Serial Number
Text 2
Delete
Text 1 Text 2
Change Change Date Format
[Date]
Copying Functions
4-34
EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high
quality print is unnecessary.
The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint].
4Press [On].
5Press [1] to [5] (Low - High) to adjust the Toner
Save Level.
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key to start copying.
Single Color
Specify one of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, or Blue, and produce copies with that color regardless of
original type.
Follow the steps shown below for Single Color Copy.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality], [Color Selection] and
then press [Single Color].
4Select color for copying from [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green] or [Blue].
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
EcoPrint
Off Toner Save Level
On
Add Shortcut
10/10/2010 10:10
Low High
12345
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Color Selection
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Auto Color
Single Color
Black &
White
Full Color
Cyan YellowMagenta
Red BlueGreen
Single Color
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-35
4
Color Balance
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.
NOTE: This feature can be used with full color copying and auto color copying.
Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Color
Balance].
4Press [On].
5Press [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color to be
adjusted (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust
each color.
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Color Balance
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Off
On
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
-5 -1-2-3-4 543210
-5 -1-2-3-4 543210
-5 -1-2-3-4 543210
-5 -1-2-3-4 543210
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-36
Hue Adjustment
Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a
strong green-yellow to make more creative copies.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
•All: Adjust hue for all colors.
•Individual: Colors can be selected individually to
adjust the hue.
NOTE: This feature can be used with full color copying
and auto color copying.
These adjustments are especially useful on rich color
images.
Follow the steps below to use image hue adjustment.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Hue
Adjustment].
4Press [All] or [Individual].
5When [All] is selected, press [ ] or [ ] to adjust
the hue.
When [Individual] is selected, select [Red],
[Magenta], [Blue], [Yellow], [Green] or [Cyan] and
then press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Yellow
Green
Blue
Red
Magenta Cyan
Hue Adjustment
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Off
Individual
All
Adjust hue for all colors.
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Red
Magenta
Blue
Yellow
Green
Cyan
Copying Functions
4-37
4
One-touch Image Adjust
Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more muted images.
NOTE: This feature can be used with full color copying and auto color copying.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item Detail Before After
Portrait Photo Portrait 1 Gives skin color a warm, rosy look.
Portrait 2 Gives skin color a tanned look.
Portrait 3 Gives skin color a whiter look.
Landscape
Photo (Blue)
Blue 1 Makes blue more vivid.
Blue 2 Makes blue a true blue without any green.
Blue 3 Gives blue a greenish (emerald green) tint.
Landscape
Photo (Green)
Green 1 Makes green more vivid.
Green 2 Gives green a yellowish-green tint.
Green 3 Gives green a slightly bluish tint.
Vivid Increases saturation for a more vivid effect.
Muted Reduces saturation for a calmer effect.
Copying Functions
4-38
NOTE: Select from one of the 9 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not possible.
Follow the steps below to use One-touch Image Adjust.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [One-
touch Image Adjust].
4Select the image.
After selecting [Portrait Photo], [Landscape Photo
(Blue)], or [Landscape Photo (Green)], press [Color
Shade], select from the 3 colors, and press [OK].
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Sharp Increases contrast for a more pronounced
image.
Smooth Reduces contrast for a softer image.
Light Makes overall color lighter and less vivid for a
bright and light feel.
Dark Makes overall color darker for a heavier feel.
Item Detail Before After
One-touch Image Adjust
Copies
Status
Cancel OK
Add Shortcut
Select desired image quality.
Before
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
Off
Portrait
Photo
Vivid
Landscape
Photo (Blue)
Landscape
Photo (Green)
Light Dark
Place original.
10/10/2010 10:10
After
Muted
Sharp Smooth
Color Shade
Blue 1
Copying Functions
4-39
4
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies
can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such
as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be
obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Blur].
The table below shows the available settings.
* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then Press
[Sharpness].
4Press [All] or [Text/Fine Line].
5When [All] is selected, press [-3] to [3] (Blur -
Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, press [0] to [3]
(Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Item Detail
All Sharpen Emphasize the image outline.
Blur Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*
effect.
Text/Fine Line Normal Make letters and lines appear sharper.
Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Sharpen
Sharpness
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
SharpenBlur
012 3
-1
-2-3
10/10/2010 10:10
Text/Fine Line
All
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-40
Background Density Adj.
Remove dark background from originals, such as
newspapers. The smaller the number becomes lighter
the background becomes. If the ground color is
obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the
ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the density of
the ground color.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Background Density Adj.].
4Press [Auto] or [Manual].
5When [Manual] is selected, press [1] to [5] (Lighter
- Darker) to adjust the background density.
6Press [OK].
7Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Original Copy
Background Density Adj.
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Manual
Off Background
Lighter Darker
12345
10/10/2010 10:10
Auto
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-41
4
Saturation
The brightness of colored parts of copies can be adjusted in 7 levels.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Saturation is disabled during auto color
copying when the black & white original has been detected.
The procedure for adjusting the saturation is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Saturation].
4Press [-3] to [3] (Grayish - Vivid) to adjust the
saturation.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Saturation
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
100%
---
:
:
:
---
VividGrayish
012 3
-1
-2-3
Place original.
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-42
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals.
The procedure for using prevent bleed-thru copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
4Press [On]. Prevent Bleed-thru is selected.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Prevent Bleed-thru
Copies
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Off On
10/10/2010 10:10
Hide background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-43
4
Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you
press [Finish Scan].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying.
The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous
Scan].
3If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On].
If Job Build is selected, press [Job Build] and select
the desired binding orientation.
4Press [OK].
5Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen and press the Start key.
If [Job Build] is selected, the next page can be
changed. Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank
paper. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex
copying to print the next page on back page.
6Place the next original and press the Start key.
Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.
•Original size •Zoom
• Original orientation • Border erase
• Original Image • Density
• Duplex • Color Selection
• Background Density Adj. • Prevent Bleed-thru
• Paper Selection
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Continuous Scan
Add Shortcut
Job Build
On
Off Select desired binding orientation.
Binding
Right
Binding
Top
Binding
Left
:
:
:
Original
Zoom
Paper
---
A4
100%
Preview
Place original.
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press Start key.
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Copies
Cancel Finish Scan
Scanner Setting
Original
Size
Original
Orientation
Original
Image
2-sided/Book
Original
Zoom Border Erase
Density
Sheet
Insertion
Next Copy:
On Back
Finishing
pages
Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press Start key.
Press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Job No.: Job Name: User Name:
000021 doc20080505113414 -----
1/2
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-44
Auto Image Rotation
Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations
are different. The images will be rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying.
NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 9-24.
The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image
Rotation].
4Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative
Image].
4Press [On] to select Negative Image.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
4-45
4
Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].
4Press [On] to select Mirror Image.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
4-46
Job Finish Notice
Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working
at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish.
NOTE: The user’s PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to
Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24.
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Example of Job Finish Notice
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice].
4
To select the destination from the address book,
press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Select
the destination to be notified on the address book
screen, then press [OK].
NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination
from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on
page 3-40.
You can view information on the notification
destination by pressing [Detail].
To: h_pttr@owl-net.net
Subject: 1234 Job end report mail
Job No.: 000002
Result: OK
End Time: Sun 10 Oct 2010 10:10:10
File Name: doc27042005145608
Job Type: Copy
------------------------------------------------
1234
Status
Cancel OK
Job Finish Notice
Add Shortcut
Address
Entry
Destination
Address
Book
Off
Detail
User A abc@def.com
Copies
Detail Address Book
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-47
4
To directly enter the E-mail address, press
[Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the
address and press [OK].
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying. Upon
completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the
selected destination.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Job Finish Notice
Add Shortcut
Address
Book
E-mail
Address
Address
Entry
Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-48
File Name Entry
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3
Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry].
4Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job,
and press [OK].
To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To
add job number, [Job No.]. Added information is
displayed in Additional Info.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying.
Priority Override
Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority
Override copying is finished.
NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority
Override].
4Press [On] to select Priority Override.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key. The current copy job is
suspended and the copy job selected in Priority
Override starts. The suspended job resumes after
Priority Override copying is finished.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
File Name Entry
Add Shortcut
Add a file name.
Additional information such as Job No.
and Date and Time can also be set.
File Name
Additional Info
Date and Time
Job No.
Job No.
doc
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-49
4
Repeat Copy
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential
documents, you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must
be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered.
IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off.
Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.
Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is
set to zero (refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-50).
You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting. Refer to Repeat Copy on page 9-29.
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to File Name Entry on
page 4-48).
Selecting Repeat Copy
Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy].
4Press [On].
To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a
4-digit password.
IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy
will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code
beforehand if necessary.
5Press [OK].
6Press the Start key to start copying and register
this job as a Repeat Copy job.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job Box on page 3-43 to print out the Repeat
Copy jobs.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Repeat Copy
Add Shortcut
Off
On
Password(4digits)
# Keys
10/10/2010 10:10
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
Copying Functions
4-50
Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained
You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the
document box.
Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and
then [Next] of Job Box.
3Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.
4Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum
retention number.
You can also enter the number from the numeric
keys.
A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the
number of retained jobs.
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use
the Repeat Copy function.
5Press [OK].
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
(0 - 50)
32
Cancel OK
Status
job(s)
10/10/2010 10:10
Copying Functions
4-51
4
OHP Backing Sheet
When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make them
difficult to handle. When using OHP Backing Sheet, a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each
transparency, making them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be copied to the backing sheet
for multiple page copying.
NOTE: For transparency film that can be used, refer to Transparencies on page Appendix-18.
Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multi purpose tray.
When OHP Backing Sheet is set, the multi purpose tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency.
If the optional document finisher is installed, you may need to specify the output destination for finished copies.
For further details, refer to Paper Output on page 4-13.
Blank Sheet
Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a
transparency. (* denotes OHP film.)
Copied Sheet
After copying to a transparency, copies the same
original image to the backing sheet paper. (* denotes
OHP film.)
Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the original.
3Load the transparencies into the multi purpose tray.
IMPORTANT: Fan through the transparencies before
loading.
Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time.
Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as
the transparencies is loaded in the cassette.
3
*
3
2
1
2
*
1
*
Original Copy
3
3
*
3
2
1
2
2
*
1
1
*
Original Copy
Copying Functions
4-52
4Press [Advanced Setup] and then Press [OHP
Backing Sheet].
5Press [Blank Sheet] or [Copied Sheet].
6Select the media to be fed. If you press [Auto], the
machine automatically selects media that matches
the size of the original.
7Press [OK].
8Press the Start key. Copying begins.
OHP Backing Sheet
Copies
Status
Cancel OK
Add Shortcut
Off
Blank Sheet Auto
Copied
Sheet
Select the paper source to feed paper.
A4
Plain
A3
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
10/10/2010 10:10
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
A4
Plain
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
5-1
5Printing
This chapter explains the functions available for printing.
For details on Using the Document Box, refer to the Chapter 7 - Document Box.
• Printing - Printing from Applications....................................................5-2
• Using a Job Box..................................................................................5-6
Printing
5-2
Printing - Printing from Applications
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
DVD (Product Library).
1Create a document using an application.
2Click File and select Print in the application. The
Print dialog box appears.
3Click the button next to the Name field and select
this machine from the list.
4Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of
copies box. Enter any number up to 999.
When there is more than one page, select Collate
to print out one by one in the sequence of the page
numbers.
5Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog
box appears.
6Select the Basic tab and click the Page Size button
to select the paper size.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or
transparency, click the Media Type menu and
select the media type.
7Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, paper is supplied
automatically from the paper source loaded with paper
of optimum size and type. To print on special paper
such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi
purpose tray and select MP Tray.
8Select paper orientation, either Portrait or
Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document.
Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document
rotated 180°.
9Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
10
Click the OK button to start printing.
Printing
5-3
5
Printer driver print settings screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. For more
information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD.
No. Description
1Quick Print
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an
icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
Basic
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,
destination, duplex printing, and color mode.
Layout
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine
mode, poster printing, and scaling.
Finishing
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and stapling.
Imaging
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and color mode of the print results.
Publishing
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
Job
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly
used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved
documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish
to print a document that you don't want others to see.
Advanced
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data. It also provides
simple color adjustment functionality.
2Profiles
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a
convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3Reset
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
1
23
Printing
5-4
Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and
display Help as explained below.
1Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the
screen and then click the item you want to know
about.
2Click the item you want to know about and press
the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Printing
5-5
5
Banner printing
When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48") is specified for printing,
the print job is treated as long document printing. When you execute printing in this case, a message appears
on the machine's operation panel. Place the paper in the multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does
not fall, and press [Continue]. To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
NOTE: When KPDL is used for PDL Settings of the printer driver, a length setting of 470.5 mm (18.53") or
longer is handled as long print.
IMPORTANT: If an output tray that cannot be used for long document printing such as Mailbox (option) is
selected in the printer driver, the output tray automatically changes to a tray that can be used.
To print on paper that is 164 g/m2 or heavier, register the paper as a custom media type in the system menu,
and select that type in Media Type in the printer driver before printing. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media
Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-42, and Media Type Setting on page 9-8.
To print on multiple sheets, place each sheet after the previous sheet is printed, and press [Continue].
After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it
feeds in correctly.
After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does
not fall.When using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand
up the stopper. Standing up the stopper may cause paper jams.
Use MP tray to print on the following paper.
Continue
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Cancel
Custom 1210x800mm
Set paper and press [Continue].
Job No.: Job Name: User Name:
Printing
5-6
Using a Job Box
The Job Box stores print data in the machine's Document Box (HDD) for later printing from the operation panel
as needed.
Private Print
Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver to send data as a Private Print.
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When
sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is
released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job.
The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver.
For details of the procedure for Private Print, refer to Private Print/Stored Job on page 7-14.
Proof and Hold Print Box
Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver to send data as a Proof and
Hold Print job.
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the
remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy
to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use
the operation panel. You can change the number of copies to print.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver.
For details of the procedure for Proof and Hold Print Box, refer to Quick Copy/Proof and Hold on page 7-15.
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in
the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set.
Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
For details of the procedure for Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents, refer to Deletion of Job
Retention on page 7-19.
Printing
5-7
5
Job Storage
Job storage is a Job storage (e-MPS) option that lets you store a print job permanently on the hard disk for
printing later. You also have the option of protecting the print job from unauthorized printing by using an access
code. This feature is available when a hard disk is installed and selected in the Device Settings tab.
Job storage is useful for jobs that need to be available for printing at any time, even if the printing system has
been turned off and turned on again.
If desired, you can attach a four-digit access code to a Job storage job, so that you can print a job without anyone
else seeing it, or restrict printing to approved users. When the access code is used, the job is not printed until a
user prints it at the printing system’s operation panel.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver.
Printing
5-8
6-1
6 Sending Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.
• Original Size........................................................................................6-2
• Sending Size.......................................................................................6-4
• Zoom...................................................................................................6-6
• Centering ............................................................................................6-7
• Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................6-8
• 2-sided/Book Original........................................................................6-11
• Original Orientation...........................................................................6-12
• File Format........................................................................................6-14
• File Separation..................................................................................6-15
• PDF Encryption Functions ................................................................6-16
• Original Image...................................................................................6-18
• Density..............................................................................................6-19
• Scan Resolution................................................................................6-20
• Sharpness.........................................................................................6-21
• Background Density Adj....................................................................6-22
• Color Selection..................................................................................6-23
• Continuous Scan...............................................................................6-24
• Prevent Bleed-thru............................................................................6-25
• Border Erase.....................................................................................6-26
• File Name Entry ................................................................................6-28
• E-mail Subject/Body..........................................................................6-29
• WSD Scan ........................................................................................6-30
• Scanning using TWAIN.....................................................................6-32
• Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................6-35
• Send and Print ..................................................................................6-36
• Send and Store .................................................................................6-36
• FTP Encrypted TX ............................................................................6-37
• Text Stamp ........................................................................................6-38
• Bates Stamp......................................................................................6-39
• Color Type.........................................................................................6-41
• Scanning with FMU Connection........................................................6-42
Sending Functions
6-2
Original Size
Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size when using
originals of nonstandard sizes.
Choose the original size from the following groups of original sizes
Item Detail Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Select from automatic
detection and standard
sizes.
Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-
R, Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II, 11×15"
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-
R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 216×340mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select from standard
sizes except Standard
Sizes 1 .
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R,
216×340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, Oficio II, 11×15", 8K,
16K, 16K-R
Others Select from Hagaki and
Custom Original Size *.
* Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom
Original Size on page 9-4.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Measurement on page 9-12.
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Size Entry Enter the size that is not
indicated in Standard
Sizes 1 and 2**.
Inch models
Horizontal: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments),
Vertical: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Sending Functions
6-3
6
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then
[Original Size].
4Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2],
[Others], or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
When you have selected [Size Entry], press [+] or
[-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
By pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric
keys.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Standard
Sizes 2
Standard
Sizes 1
Auto
Others
Size Entry
A4
A6
B5
A3
A5
B4
A4
A5
B5
Original Size
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
B6 B6
Destination
216x340mm
100%
A4
A4
:
:
:
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
10/10/2010 10:10
X
Y
mm
mm
# Keys
# Keys
(50 - 432)
(50 - 297)
297
210
Destination
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Original Size
Standard
Sizes 2
Standard
Sizes 1
Others
Size Entry
100%
A4
210x297mm
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-4
Sending Size
Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).
The table below lists the sizes.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 6-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following
table.
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
Item Detail Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Select from Same
as Original Size or
Standard Size.
Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Legal, Letter, Statement, Oficio II, 11×15"
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, B4, A4,
B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio,
216 × 340mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select from
standard size
except Standard
Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio,
8K, 16K, 216 × 340mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement,
Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K
Others Select from
Hagaki.
Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki
Original Size and the size you
wish to send as are the same different
Original Size Specify as
necessary
Specify as
necessary
Sending Size Select [Same as
Original]
Select the
required size
Zoom Select [100%]
(or [Auto])
Select [Auto]
Sending Functions
6-5
6
Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send Key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then
[Sending Size].
4Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or
[Others] to select the sending size.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Same as
Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
Sending Size
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Destination
A3
A5 A6
A4
B4
B5 B6 216x340mm
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-6
Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.
The table below lists the available options.
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 6-4 when selecting the sending size.
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.
To select the original size vertically and horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in
Centering on page 6-7.
Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.
1Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen.
3
Select the transmission size.
4Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom].
5Press [100%] or [Auto].
6Press [OK].
7Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Item Detail
100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)
Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
Enlarge or reduce the original.
[100%]: Produce at actual size.
[Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match the required size.
Auto
Zoom
100%
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Destination
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-7
6
Centering
When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these
sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed
with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.
Use the procedure below to center the image when sending a scanned image.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering].
4Press [On]. Centering is performed.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
6-8
Mixed Size Originals
Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. In this
operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Originals of the Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
• Legal and Letter-R (A4-R and Folio)
• B4 and B5
Ledger
(A3)
Ledger
(A3)
Letter
(A4)
Letter
(A4)
Legal
(Folio)
Letter-R
(A4-R)
Legal
(Folio)
Letter-R
(A4-R)
Sending Functions
6-9
6
Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)
The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R, B5-R, and Folio, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) on page 9-10.
• A3, B4, A4, B5
• B4, A4-R, B5
• A4-R, B5-R, Folio
A4-RB4 B5 A4-R
B4B5
A4-R
B5-R
B5-RA4-R
Sending Functions
6-10
Use the procedure below to send mixed size originals as a batch.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the original into the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different width,
arrange the originals so that their left sides and top
sides are aligned, and place the originals in alignment
with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned
in this way, they may not be scanned correctly, and
skewing or original jams may result.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [Mixed
Size Originals].
4Select the combination of originals from
[Same Width] and [Different Width].
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Scan all sheets in the document processor,
even if differently sized, then send.
*Up to 30 sheets can be placed in
the document processor for mixed
size originals.
Off Same Width
Mixed Size Originals
Different
Width
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Destination
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-11
6
2-sided/Book Original
Select the type and binding of the original depending on the original.
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [2-
sided/Book Original].
4Press [1-sided], [2-sided], or [Book].
5When selecting [2-sided], select the binding
direction and press [Original Orientation] to select
the direction in which the original is set on the
platen.
When selecting [Book], select the binding direction.
6Press [OK].
7Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Original Type Binding
1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided —
2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided*
* Only when the optional document processor is used.
Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Open Book Original such
as magazine and book
Book Binding Left,
Binding Right
RightLeft
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
2-sided/Book Original
Book
2-sided
1-sided
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Destination
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-12
Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of the original .
To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.
• 2-sided/Book Original
• Border Erase
NOTE: If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation (page 9-16) setting in the System Menu, the
selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing the original on the platen
When placing the original on the optional document processor
Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left]
Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left]
Sending Functions
6-13
6
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then
[Original Orientation].
4Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top]
and [Top Edge on Left].
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Select the orientation of the
original document's top edge.
Top Edge
on Left
Original Orientation
Top Edge
on Top
Destination
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-14
File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
NOTE: When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality.
You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, see PDF Encryption Functions on page 6-16
File Format Adjustable range of image
quality Color mode
PDF*
* The file format can be set to [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b].
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full
Color, Grayscale
XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
High Comp.
PDF*
Compression Ratio Priority to
Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale
Sending Functions
6-15
6
Use the procedures below to select the file format for transmission.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [File
Format].
4Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG],
[XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been
selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image
quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can
specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
NOTE: If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings
cannot be specified.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.
Use the procedures below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format] and then [File
Separation].
4Press [Each Page] to set File Separation.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key.
The scanned originals are sent after being divided
into files of one page each.
NOTE: A three-digit serial number such as
abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
the file name.
Image Quality
File Format
Encryption
Off
TIFF
PDF
JPEG
High Comp.
PDF
Destination
Status
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
XPS
Compression
Ratio Priority
Standard Quality
Priority
PDF/A
Off
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
File Separation
Create and send a file for each page
of the original that was read.
Off Each Page
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-16
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying,
printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
When you send a PDF file, use the procedures below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Org./Sending Data Format], [File Format],
[PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and [Encryption].
4Press [ ] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 3.0 and
later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
5When you enter the password to open the PDF file,
select [On] of Password to Open Document.
6Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again
for confirmation. Then press [OK].
8When you enter the password to edit the PDF file,
select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.
9In the same way as the entry of Password to Open
Document, enter the password to change the PDF
file.
10
Press [Detail].
Item Value Detail
Compatibility Acrobat 3.0 or later,
Acrobat 5.0 or later
Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.
Password to
Open
Document
Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file
Password to
Edit/Print
Document
Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
File Format - Encryption
Off
Compatibility Acrobat 3.0 and later
Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)
Password to Open
Document
On
Off
On
Password
Confirmation
Password
Confirmation
Detail
Password
to Edit/Print
Document
Status
Cancel OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-17
6
11
Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [ ]
of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of
limit). The item to be displayed differs according to
the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in
step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
12
Press [ ] of Changes Allowed, and select the
item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed
differs according to the version of Acrobat selected
in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
13
From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select
[Disable] or [Enable].
File Format - Detail
Printing Allowed Not Allowed
Changes Allowed Not Allowed
Copying of Text/Images/Others
Disable
Enable
Status
Cancel OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Item Detail
Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible
Allowed (Low Resolution only)*
* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution
Item Detail
Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Pages*
* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
PDF file
Commenting Can only add commenting
Page Layout except extracting
Pages**
** Only displayed when [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Can change the page layout except extracting the
pages of the PDF file
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
of the PDF file
Sending Functions
6-18
The table below shows the available settings.
14 Press [OK] three times to return to Orig./Sending
Data Format.
15 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Original Image
Select the image quality suitable to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Use the procedures below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original
Image].
4Select the original image.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Item Detail
Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.
Item Detail
Text+Photo Text and photos together.
Photo For photos taken with a camera.
Text*
*The for OCR setting can be turned on. When [On] is selected, scanning
produces an image that is suitable for OCR. This function is only available
for black and white mode.
Only text, no photos.
Select original image type
for best results.
Original Image
Text+Photo
Photo
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
Text
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-19
6
Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.
You can adjust density using 13 levels.
The procedures for adjusting the density is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density].
4Press [-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust
density.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Darker
Density
Auto
NormalLighter
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
0+1+2+3
-1
-2-3
-2.5 -1.5 -0.5 +0.5 +1.5 +2.5
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-20
Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and
longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
The procedures for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan
Resolution].
4Select the resolution.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
The larger the number, the better the
image resolution.
400x400dpi
Ultra Fine
Scan Resolution
300x300dpi
200x200dpi
Fine
200x100dpi
Normal
200x400dpi
Super Fine
600x600dpi
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-21
6
Sharpness
Select the sharpness of the image outline.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness].
4Press [All] or [Text/Fine Line].
5When [All] is selected, press [-3] to [+3] (Blur -
Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, press [0] to [3]
(Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
6Press [OK].
7Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Item Detail
All Sharpen Emphasize the image outline.
Blur Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire
effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns
when scanning printed photos).
Text/Fine Line Normal Make letters and lines appear sharper.
Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Sharpen
Sharpen
Sharpness
Blur
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
0123
-1
-2-3
Sharpness
All
Text/Fine Line
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-22
Background Density Adj.
Remove dark background from originals, such as newspapers. The smaller the number becomes lighter the
background becomes.If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color,
select [Manual] and adjust the density of the ground color.
Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background
Density Adj.].
4Press [Auto] or [Manual].
5When [Manual] is selected, press [1] to [5] (Lighter
- Darker) to adjust the background density.
6Press [OK].
7Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Manual
Off Background
Background Density Adj.
Lighter Darker
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
12345
Auto
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-23
6
Color Selection
This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from
Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.
Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color
Selection].
4Select the color mode to be used for scanning.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Black & WhiteGrayscale
Color Selection
Full Color
Select scanning color.
Use [Auto Color] to automatically produce color originals
in full color and black & white originals in black & white.
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
Auto Color
(Color/B & W)
Auto Color
(Color/Gray)
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-24
Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [Finish Scan].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
• Original Size
• Original Orientation
• 2-sided/Book Original
•Density
• Original Image
• Scan Resolution
• Color Selection
• Sending Size
•Zoom
• Border Erase
• Prevent Bleed-thru
• FAX TX Resolution (For details, refer to Fax System (V) Operation Guide.)
The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous
Scan].
3Press [On]. Continuous Scan is selected.
4Press [OK].
5Specify the destination.
6Place the original, and press the Start key.
When the scanning is completed, change the
settings as necessary.
7
Place the next original, and press the
Start
key. Scan
the remaining originals by the same procedure.
When you have scanned all the originals, press
[Finish Scan] to start sending.
Continuous Scan
Scan a large number of originals
in separate batches and then produce
as one job.
*Settings can be changed during scanning.
Off On
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-25
6
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals.
Use the procedure below to set the prevent bleed-thru when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
4Press [On]. Prevent Bleed-thru is selected.
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Hide background colors and image bleed-through
when scanning thin original.
On
Prevent Bleed-thru
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
Off
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-26
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and
sending originals. The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Individual Border Erase
Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
In each option, the available ranges are as below.
Original Copy
Original Copy
Original Copy
Input units Border Erase Range
Inch models 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Sending Functions
6-27
6
Border Erase to Back Page
When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].
4Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
borders for a book.
Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry.
Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the
individual border erase.
Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [#
Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys.
Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
orientation from either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top
Edge on Left], and press [OK].
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Item Detail
Same as Front
Page
Border Erase performed using the same setting as the
front page
Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page
Border Erase
Sheet
Border Erase
Book
Off
Individual
Border Erase
Border
Border Erase
Gutter
mm
mm
# Keys
# Keys
(0 - 50)
(0 - 50)
6
6
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
Back Page
Same as
Front Page
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Top
Border Erase
Bottom
Left
Right
(0 - 50)
mm
# Keys
Top Edge
on Top
Original
Orientation
6
6
6
6
Border Erase
Sheet
Border Erase
Book
Off
Individual
Border Erase
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
Back Page
Same as
Front Page
mm
mm
mm
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-28
File Name Entry
This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. A job number and the date and time can
be added. You can specify a default for the document name.
Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name
Entry].
4Press [File Name].
5Enter the document name, and press [OK].
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the
document name.
6Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and
Time] to enter the date and time.
7Press [OK].
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Add a file name.
Additional information such as Job No.
and Date and Time can also be set.
File Name Entry
File Name doc
Additional Info
Job No. Date and Time
[ ]Date and Time
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-29
6
E-mail Subject/Body
When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail.
Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/
Body].
4Press [Subject].
5Enter the subject, and press [OK].
NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the
subject.
6Press [Body].
7Enter the body and press [OK].
NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the
body.
8You can press [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to
enter stored text for the body text.
NOTE: For details on registering templates, refer to
E-mail Subject/Body on page 9-29.
9Press [OK].
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Subject
Body
E-mail Subject/Body
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
Template Body 1 Body 2 Body 3
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Send
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-30
WSD Scan
(Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008)
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE: To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-
connected, and WSD Scan Setup (page 9-98) is set to On in the network settings. For information on operating
the computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7)
1Click Start and then Network in the computer.
2Right-click the machine’s icon (Kyocera: XXX:XXX)
and then click Install.
NOTE: If the User Account Control window appears,
click Continue.
If the Found New Hardware window appears, click
Cancel.
3During the installation, double-click the icon shown
on the task bar to display the Driver Software
Installation screen. When Your devices are
ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software
Installation screen, the installation is completed.
Procedure Using this machine
1Press the Send Key.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press [WSD Scan].
4Press [From Operation Panel] and press [Next].
Sending Functions
6-31
6
5Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.
You can view information on the selected computer
by pressing [Detail].
6Select the type of originals, file format, etc., as
necessary.
7Press the Start key. Sending begins and the
software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer
1Press the Send Key.
The send screen appears.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
2Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press [WSD Scan].
4Press [From Computer] and press [Next].
5Use the software installed on the computer to send
the images.
Status
Back OKCancel
Computer Name
Select the destination computer and press [OK].
WSD Scan - Selecting Computer
pc000102
pc000101
1/1 Detail
pc000105
pc000104
pc000103
Reload
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-32
Scanning using TWAIN
This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The machine’s TWAIN/WIA can be used for two
types of scanning: scanning a document placed in the machine, and scanning a document that has been stored
in a custom box.
The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the
same way.
Scanning a document placed in the machine
1Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2Select the machine using the application and
display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation
Guide or Help for each application software.
3Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box
that opens.
The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows.
Item Detail
Original
Configurations
Original Size Select the scan size of the original.
Original
Orientation
Specify the type of binding.
Send
Configurations
Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided.
Image Quality
Configurations
Color Setting Select the color mode.
Resolution Select the resolution.
Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original.
Image Quality
Settings
Density Select the exposure.
Prevent Bleed-thru Hide background colors and image bleed-through when
scanning thin originals.
Sending Functions
6-33
6
4Place the originals on the platen or in the document
processor.
5Click the Scan button.
The document data is scanned.
Scanning a document stored in a custom box
NOTE: To scan a document stored in a custom box, select a model name with (Box) from Model in the TWAIN
driver settings screen.
1Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2Select the machine using the application and
display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation
Guide or Help for each application software.
3Select the Custom Box containing the document
file to be scanned from the Box List. If a password
has been set for the box, the password entry
screen appears. Enter the password and click the
OK button. When you select a box, the document
files in the Custom Box appear in the Document
List.
Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently used
settings. When the Configuration button is clicked, a setting
screen opens with buttons for Details, Add current
configuration, and Delete selected configuration.
Details Current settings can be checked.
Add current
configuration
Save current settings with a name and comment.
Delete selected
configuration
Delete saved settings.
Item Detail
Sending Functions
6-34
4Set how to display the document data. Click the
Setting button to select each item.
5Click the OK button.
6Select the document data to be scanned from
Document List.
Enter the document data name in the Search
[Name] to find the data having the same document
data name or the document data name with the
same beginning.
7Click the Detail button to display the selected
document data. When the document data includes
multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the
pages you want to scan. The selected pages will be
scanned.
NOTE: In this case, the scanned page or the selected
document data will not be deleted from the Custom
Box.
8Click the Acquire button. The document data is
scanned.
Item Detail
View Change the display in the Document List field to List or Thumbnails.
Delete
After scanning the document data, delete the data from the Custom Box.
Invert Invert the document data color to start scanning.
Sending Functions
6-35
6
Job Finish Notice
Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working
at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish.
NOTE: The user’s PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to
Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24.
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish
Notice].
4To select the destination from the address book,
press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
then press [Address Book] in the next screen.
Select the destination to be notified, then press
[OK].
You can view information on the notification
destination by pressing [Detail].
5Specify the destination to send the finish notice,
and press [OK].
NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination
from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on
page 3-40.
6To directly enter the address, press [Address Entry]
and then [E-mail Address].
7Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK].
8Press [OK].
9Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
When the sending is completed, the finish notice is
sent to the specified E-mail address.
Job Finish Notice
Destination Detail
Detail Address Book
Address
Entry
Address
Book
Off
Destination
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Job Finish Notice
E-mail
Address
Address
Entry
Address
Book
Off
Destination
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-36
Send and Print
When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent.
The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print].
4Press [On].
5Press [OK].
6Specify the destination and press the Start key.
Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is printed.
Send and Store
When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.
The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [Send and
Store].
4Press [On].
5Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be
stored.
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box
appears, enter the password.
You can view information on the selected Custom
Box by pressing [Detail].
6Press [OK].
7Specify the destination and press the Start key.
Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is stored in the specified Custom Box.
Send and Store
Off
On
No. Name Used
2/2
Cancel OKAdd Shortcut
Status
Destination
0006 Box 6MB
0007 Box 4MB
0008 Box 8MB
0009 Box 4MB
0010 Box 2MB
Custom Box
Detail
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-37
6
FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select
the encryption method in the basic send screen.
Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.
1Press the Send Key.
2Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [FTP
Encrypted TX].
4Press [On].
5Press [OK].
NOTE: You can only change the settings by logging in
with administrator privileges.
Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5
for the default login user name and password.
Click Settings -> Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the
Command Center RX. Be sure that SSL of Secure
Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective
encryption are selected in Clientside Settings. For
details, refer to the Command Center RX Operation
Guide.
Sending Functions
6-38
Text Stamp
When sending, you can display a text stamp on the originals.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Sending Jobs on
page 9-34.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Use the procedure below to specify the Text Stamp settings.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then press [Text
Stamp].
4Press [On].
5Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be
displayed, or select a text stamp from the displayed
templates.
NOTE: Templates that have been set will appear. For
details on registering templates, refer to System
Stamp on page 9-30.
6Press [Position] and select the position of the text
stamp.
Item Detail
Position Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Font Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp.*
* Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic]
can be set.
Color Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Text Stamp
Add Shortcut
Keyboard
On
Off Stamp
URGENT COPY
Position Font Original
Orientation
Top
Left
pt
Black
9 Top Edge
on Top
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-39
6
7Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the text stamp.
8Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
9Press [OK].
10
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Bates Stamp
When sending, you can display a Bates stamp on the originals.
NOTE: This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings. For details, see Sending Jobs on
page 9-34.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
Item Detail
Position Selectable positions are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right],
[Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom
Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Font Size Set the font size of the printed bates stamp.*
* Registered font sizes are displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to System Stamp on
page 9-30.
Style Set the font style of the printed bates stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can
be set.
Font Set the font of the printed bates stamp. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color Set the color of the printed bates stamp. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed bates stamp.
Display
Pattern
Set the display method of the printed bates stamp.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Sending Functions
6-40
Use the procedure below to specify the Bates Stamp settings.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen.
3Press [Advanced Setup] and then press [Bates
Stamp].
4Press [On].
5Press [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number],
[Numbering], [Text 1], or [Text 2], and set additional
information to be displayed with the stamp.
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change]
below it and enter the text string to be displayed.
If you selected [Date], press [Date Format] and
select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/
MM/DD] to set the date format.
If you selected [Numbering], press [Numbering
Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 to
9999999).
6Press [Position] and select the position of the text
stamp.
7Press [Font] and select font and display settings for
the text stamp.
8Press [Original Orientation] to choose the
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].
9
Press [OK].
10
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Status
Copies
Cancel OK
Bates Stamp
Add Shortcut
On
Off Stamp
Date User Name
Numbering
Default
Position Font Original
Orientation
Each
Print Page
Top Left pt
Black
9Top Edge
on Top
Numbering Text 1
Serial Number
Text 2
Delete
Text 1 Text 2
Change Change Date Format
[Date]
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-41
6
Color Type
This sets the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
1Press System Menu key.
2Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type.
3Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
4Press [OK].
Item Detail
RGB Send color document in RGB.
sRGB Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems.
Send - Color Type
Specify the color type to send color images.
RGB
sRGB
Profile:
RGB FINE 1
Status
Cancel OK
10/10/2010 10:10
Sending Functions
6-42
Scanning with FMU Connection
"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application. FMU Connection can be used to scan an
original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" on the provided DVD, and save the
image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder. Unlike regular transmission
functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the data format.
NOTE: The first time you use FMU Connection, you must enable it in the system menu. For details, see
Application on page 9-88.
To use FMU Connection, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for
the multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management
Utility, refer to Installing Software on page 2-16.
For information on using File Management Utility, see File Management Utility User Guide on the DVD.
Using FMU Connection to scan an original
1Make sure that File Management Utility is running
on the computer (or server) on which File
Management Utility is installed.
2Place the original.
3Press the Application key.
The application list appears.
4Press [FMU Connection].
FMU Connection starts.
5Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the
necessary information and press [Next].
6When the scan settings screen appears, press
each item and configure the necessary settings.
The features that can be set depend on File
Management Utility.
7Press the Start key.
Transmission starts.
7-1
7Document Box
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.
• Using a Custom Box ...........................................................................7-2
• Job Box.............................................................................................7-14
• Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory..................7-22
• Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .........................7-24
• Removing USB Memory ...................................................................7-26
Document Box
7-2
Using a Custom Box
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-50.
Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box)
Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box] and then [Add/Edit Box].
3Press [Add].
4Press [Change] for each item, enter the information
and then press [OK].
The table below lists the items to be set.
No. Name Owner Used
Add/Edit Box
1/1
0001 SALES Anonymous - - - -
Store File Detail Open
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
Status
FAX Box
Search(No.)
Search(Name)
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Item Detail
Box No Enter the box number by pressing [-, +] or number keys.
The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique
number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be automatically
assigned.
Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.
Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering
characters.
Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the
box. Entering a password is not mandatory.
Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm
Password].
Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box can be restricted.
To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom
Box in megabytes by pressing [-, +] or number keys.
You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000. (Changes according to the number of
created custom boxes.)
Document Box
7-3
7
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, "Owner"
and "Permission" are also displayed. Refer to Creating
new Custom Boxes when user login administration is
enabled on page 3-51.
5Check the details you have entered and then press
[Add]. The Custom Box is created.
Setting the document deletion time
Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted.
The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Custom Box, [Next] of Default Setting and then
[Change] of Auto File Deletion Time.
3Set the time at which the document is deleted by
pressing [+], [-]. Press [# Keys] to enter the time
directly using the numeric keys.
4Press [OK]. The time for document deletion is set.
Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.
Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys
to enter the number of days for which documents are stored.
You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). To disable automatic file
deletion, press [Off].
Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new
documents are stored.
To overwrite old documents, press [Permit].
To retain old documents, press [Prohibit].
Delete after
Printed
Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To delete
the document, press [On]. To retain the document, press [Off].
Item Detail
Status
Document Box/Removable Memory - Auto File Deletion Time
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.
Cancel OK
Hour
21
# Keys
Minute
30
# Keys
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-4
Storing Documents (Store File)
The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Place the originals in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press [Custom Box], select the box where the
document will be stored and then press [Store File].
4Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc.,
as necessary.
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document Store features on page 7-4.
5Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the
data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
Document Store features
The features below can be selected when saving a document.
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
No. Name Owner Used
Add/Edit Box
1/1
0001 SALES Anonymous - - - -
Store File Detail Open
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
Status
FAX Box
Search(No.)
Search(Name)
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
• Original Size (page 6-2) • Density (page 6-19) • Zoom (page 6-6)
• Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) • Original Image (page 6-18) • Centering (page 6-7)
• 2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11)
• Scan Resolution (page 6-20) • Border Erase (page 6-26)
• Original Orientation (page 6-12) • Color Selection (page 6-23) • Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
• Storing Size (page 7-4) • Sharpness (page 6-21) • Job Finish Notice (page 6-35)
• Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) • Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
• File Name Entry (page 6-28)
Item Description
Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original.
Metric Select from A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.
inch Select from Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15" or Oficio II.
Others Select from 8K, 16K, Hagaki or Oufuku hagaki.
Document Box
7-5
7
Printing Documents (Print)
The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to print and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3Select the document you wish to print by checking
the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
remove the checkmark.
4Press [Print].
5Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as
desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document print features on page 7-6.
If a document stored from a computer is selected,
the print settings selection screen appears.
• To use the settings used at the time of printing
(when the document was saved), press [Print
As Is]. Press [Start Print] to start printing.
• To change the print settings, press [Print after
Change Settings] and change the print settings.
After a document saved in the machine is selected,
the [User File Settings] key may appear in the
setting screen for the feature to be used.
• To use the settings saved with the document,
press [User File Settings].
• If you need to change the print settings, change
the print settings.
6Press the Start key. Printing of the selected
document begins.
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-6
Document print features
The features below can be selected when printing a document.
• Paper Selection (page 4-3) • Page # (page 4-24) • Hue Adjustment (page 4-36)
• Collate/Offset (page 3-15) • Job Finish Notice (page 4-46) • One-touch Image Adjust
(page 4-37)
• Staple (page 3-19) • File Name Entry (page 4-48) • Saturation (page 4-41)
• Punch (page 3-21) • Delete after Printed (page 7-2) • Density (page 3-9)
• Paper Output (page 4-13) • Priority Override (page 4-48) • Original Image (page 3-10)
• Combine (page 4-14) • EcoPrint (page 4-34) • Color Selection (page 6-23)
• Margin/Centering (page 4-16) • Zoom (page 6-6) • Sharpness (page 4-39)
• Booklet (page 4-20) • Fold (page 4-11) • Background Density Adj.
(page 4-40)
• Duplex (page 3-13) • Text Stamp (page 4-31) • Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-42)
• Cover (page 4-22) • Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
• Form Overlay (page 7-9) • Color Balance (page 4-35)
Document Box
7-7
7
Sending Documents (Send)
The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to send and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3Select the document you wish to send by checking
the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE:
You cannot select and send multiple documents.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
checkmark.
4Press [Send].
The screen for sending appears.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear.
5Set the destination.
NOTE:
For more information on selecting destinations,
refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
6Set the sending size, original image, etc., as
desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document send features on page 7-8.
7Press the Start key. Sending of the selected
document begins.
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-8
Document send features
The features below can be selected when sending a document.
Delete after Transmitted
After the document is sent, the document is deleted from the document box.
• Sending Size (page 6-4) • i-FAX Subject/Body
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
• Original Image (page 6-18)
• File Format (page 6-14) • FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-37) • Resolution (page 6-18)
• FAX TX Resolution
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
• Delete after Transmitted
(page 7-8)
• Color Selection (page 6-23)
• Centering (page 6-7) • Zoom (page 6-6) • Sharpness (page 6-21)
• FAX Delayed Transmission
(refer to Fax Operation Guide)
• File Separation (page 6-15) • Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
• Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) • Text Stamp (page 6-38) • Prevent Bleed-thru
(page 6-25)
• File Name Entry (page 6-28) • Bates Stamp (page 6-39)
• E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29) • Density (page 6-19)
Document Box
7-9
7
Form Overlay from Custom Boxes (Form Overlay)
This function allows you to retrieve images (image files), overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes
and then print the results.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to overlay the image into and
print, and then press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3Select the document you wish to print by checking
the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
remove the checkmark.
4Press [Print].
5Press [Functions], [Form Overlay], [Select Stored
Form], and then [Select Form].
NOTE: You can select the form density setting through
4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or
[-] buttons in Density.
6In Form Overlay - Select Form, select the image file
to be overlaid onto the document from the
displayed document boxes.
You can only select one image file.
7Press [OK].
8Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen.
9Press the Start key. Printing begins.
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Copies
Cancel OK
Form Overlay
Add Shortcut
Density
Select
Stored Form
%
Off (10 - 30, 100)
Form 1
Select
Form
Status
30
100%
A4
A4
Preview
Original
Zoom
Paper
:
:
:
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-10
Editing Documents
This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple
documents together. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine.
Moving a Document / Copying a Document (Move/Copy)
The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to move or copy and press
[Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3Select the document in the list that you want to
move or copy by pressing the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
remove the checkmark.
4Press [Move/Copy].
5To move the document, press [Move to Custom
Box].
To copy the document, press [Copy to Custom Box]
or [Copy to Memory].
6Press [Next].
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Move/Copy
Move to
Custom Box
Status
Copy to
Custom Box
Copy to
Memory
Select the required operation and press [Next].
NextBackCancel
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-11
7
7To copy or move the document to a custom box,
select the destination box.
To copy the document to USB memory, select the
destination folder and press [Next]. If necessary,
set the saved file size and the file format, etc.
8Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen. The selected document is
moved or copied.
NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be
moved or copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
Joining Documents (Join)
The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below.
NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the
documents to be joined beforehand.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
documents you want to join and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3Select the documents in the list that you wish to join
by pressing the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
You can join up to 10 documents.
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
remove the checkmark.
4Press [Join].
Move
Move to Custom Box
Status
Select the destination box and press [Move].
BackCancel
20001 Document1 Administrator
50004 Document4 Administrator
30003 Document3 Administrator
30002 Document2 Administrator
UsedNo. Name Owner
Open
Up
MB
MB
MB
MB
Document
10/10/2010 10:10
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-12
5Arrange the documents into the order in which they
are to be joined.
Highlight the document you want to rearrange and
press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place
in the sequence.
6Press [Next].
7Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined
document and press [OK].
NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
8Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the
confirmation screen. The documents are joined.
NOTE: After joining, the original documents are left
unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer
needed.
Next
File Name
Up
Date and Time Size
1/1
Join
Down
Status
Cancel
Confirm the order of documents to combine.
2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB
2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB
2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:10 21 MB
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-13
7
Deleting Documents
The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the
document you want to delete and press [Open].
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.
3Select the document you wish to delete by
checking the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is
selected.
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
checkmark.
4Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen
appears.
5Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
1/1
0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21
Box:
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
Status
2008101010574511
2008101010574521
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
MB
MB
21
21
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
Detail
Preview
Close
0002
0003
Search(Name)
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-14
Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job
Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/
Stored Job.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver.
Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box
You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Job Box].
3Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
4Select the creator of the document to print and
press [Open].
5Select the document and press [Print].
6If the document is protected by a password, enter
the password using the numeric keys.
7Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
8Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is
automatically deleted.
Close
Private Print/Stored Job
1/2
Open
User Name Files
Status
5
2
1
1
1
User
User
User
User
User
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
1/1
Detail
Close
User:
File
File
File
File
File
Print Delete
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:45
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 09:55
2010/10/10 10:00
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
30
MB
21
MB21
MB
36
MB
30
Status
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-15
7
Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below to delete a document.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Job Box].
3Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
4Select the creator of the document and press
[Open].
5To delete the document, select the document and
press [Delete].
When the delete confirmation screen appears,
press [Yes].
If the document is protected by a password, enter
the password using the numeric keys and the
document is deleted.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy
or Proof and Hold Print job.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the
printer driver.
Quick Copy Job Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.
1Press the System Menu key.
Close
Private Print/Stored Job
1/2
Open
User Name Files
Status
5
2
1
1
1
User
User
User
User
User
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
1/1
Detail
Close
User:
File
File
File
File
File
Print Delete
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:45
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 09:55
2010/10/10 10:00
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
30
MB
21
MB21
MB
36
MB
30
Status
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-16
2Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Job Box, then [Change] of Quick Copy Job
Retention.
3Press [+] or [–] to enter the maximum number of
stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0
and 50.
You can also enter the number using the numeric
keys.
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use
the Repeat Copy function.
4Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is
set.
Printing a Document
You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Job Box].
3Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press
[Open].
4Select the creator of the document and press
[Open].
5Select the document to print, and press [Print].
Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention
Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
(0 - 50)
32
Cancel OK
Status
job(s)
10/10/2010 10:10
Close
1/2
Open
User Name Files
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
Status
5
2
1
1
1
User
User
User
User
User
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
1/1
Detail
Close
User:
File
File
File
File
File
Print Delete
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:45
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 09:55
2010/10/10 10:00
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
30
MB
21
MB21
MB
36
MB
30
Status
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-17
7
6Specify the number of prints as desired.
7Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below to delete a document.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then
[Open].
3Select the creator of the document and press
[Open].
4Select the document to delete and press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
5Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
Close
1/2
Open
User Name Files
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
Status
5
2
1
1
1
User
User
User
User
User
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
1/1
Detail
Close
User:
File
File
File
File
File
Print Delete
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:45
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 09:55
2010/10/10 10:00
File Name Date and Time Size
MB
30
MB
21
MB21
MB
36
MB
30
Status
1
2
3
4
5
10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-18
Repeat Copy
Repeat Copy Job Retention
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Job Box, [Change] of Repeat Copy Job
Retention.
3Use the [+] and [–] keys or the numeric keys to
enter the maximum number of stored jobs.
You can enter any number between 0 and 50.
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), no jobs are
stored.
4Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is
set.
Printing a Document
You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Job Box].
3Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].
4Select the document to print and press [Print].
5If the document is protected by a password, enter
the password using the numeric keys.
6Press [Start Print] to start printing.
The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the
main power switch is turned off.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
(0 - 50)
32
Cancel OK
Status
job(s)
10/10/2010 10:10
Name Date and Time Size
2008101000101002 10/10/2010 10:10
001/001
Detail
Print
Close
Delete
Repeat Copy
MB21
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Document Box
7-19
7
Deletion of Job Retention
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved
temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]
of Job Box, then [Change] of Deletion of Job
Retention.
3Select the time for automatic deletion.
To deactivate automatic deletion, press [Off].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved
after the function is set. Regardless of this function
setting, temporary documents are deleted when the
main power switch is turned off.
Item Detail
Off Temporary documents are not automatically
deleted.
1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour.
4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours.
1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day.
1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week.
Document Box
7-20
Form for Form Overlay
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box. One page can be
registered in one form.
Use the procedure below to store a form.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Place the original in the document processor or on
the platen.
3Press [Job Box].
4Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
5Press [Store File].
6If necessary, select the image quality of original,
scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.
7Press the Start key. The original is scanned and
stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.
NOTE: For information on using image overlays with a
stored form, see Form Overlay on page 4-23 and Form
Overlay from Custom Boxes (Form Overlay) on page
7-9.
Name Files
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
Removable
Memory
Job BoxCustom Box
Open
Repeat Copy
Form for Form Overlay
Private Print/Stored Job 21
Status
FAX Box
21
21
21
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
Form for Form Overlay
Name Date and Time Size
2008101000530910
1/1
Detail
Print
Close
Delete Store File
2008101009530900 2010/10/10 09:00
2010/10/10 09:10 MB30
MB21
2008101000530920 2010/10/10 09:20 MB30
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Document Box
7-21
7
Deleting a Form Stored
You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.
Use the procedure below to delete a form.
1Press the Document Box key.
2Press [Job Box].
3Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
4Select the form to delete and press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
5Press [Yes]. The form is deleted.
Form for Form Overlay
Name Date and Time Size
2008101000530910
1/1
Detail
Print
Close
Delete Store File
2008101009530900 2010/10/10 09:00
2010/10/10 09:10 MB30
MB21
2008101000530920 2010/10/10 09:20 MB30
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Document Box
7-22
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the
USB memory without having to use a computer.
Limitations
• The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• Encrypted PDF file
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Port (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is
error free if a USB hub is used.
Printing (Print)
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.
1Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1).
IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this
machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other
device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted. may appear. To format a USB memory,
press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen.
2 When the machine reads the USB memory,
Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the
Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].
3Select the folder containing the file to be printed
and press [Open].
The machine will display documents in the top 3
folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE: 1000 documents can be displayed.
To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
Document Box
7-23
7
4Select the file to be printed and press [Print].
5Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc.
as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document print features on page 7-23.
After a document saved in the machine is selected,
the [User File Settings] key may appear in the
setting screen for the feature to be used.
• To use the settings saved with the document,
press [User File Settings].
• If you need to change the print settings, change
the print settings.
6Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file
begins.
Document print features
The features below can be selected when printing a document.
Encrypted PDF Password
To print a PDF that is protected by a password, enter the password before printing.
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files.
Status
DetailDelete
Memory
Information
001/999
Name Date and Time Size
Remove
Memory
Print
Document MB1
Document MB3
Document MB4
Document MB1
Document MB2
2010/10/10 09:30
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
2010/10/10 10:05
Removable Memory
Store FileOpen
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
FAX Box
Up
1
2
3
4
5
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
• Paper Selection (page 4-3) • Duplex (page 3-13) • Bates Stamp (page 4-32)
• Collate/Offset (page 3-15) • Job Finish Notice (page 4-46) • Encrypted PDF Password
(page 7-23)
• Staple (page 3-19) • Priority Override (page 4-48) • JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-23)
• Punch (page 3-21) • Fold (page 4-11) • XPS Fit to Page(page 7-23)
• Paper Output (page 4-13) • Text Stamp (page 4-31) • Color Selection (page 6-23)
Item Description
Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution.
Document Box
7-24
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.
NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.
Storing Documents (Store File)
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
1Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1).
IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been
formatted on this machine. If USB memory formatted on
another device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted message may appear. To format the USB
memory, press [Format].
CAUTION: When [Format] is pressed, all data in the
external media is erased.
2 When the machine reads the USB memory,
Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the
Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].
Document Box
7-25
7
3
Select the folder where the file will be stored and
press [Open].
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels,
including the root folder.
4
Press [Store File].
5
Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to
Document Store features on page 7-25.
6
Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the
data is stored in the USB memory.
Document Store features
The features below can be selected when saving a document.
Status
DetailDelete
Memory
Information
001/999
Name Date and Time Size
Remove
Memory
Print
Document MB1
Document MB3
Document MB4
Document MB1
Document MB2
2010/10/10 09:30
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
2010/10/10 10:05
Removable Memory
Store FileOpen
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
FAX Box
Up
1
2
3
4
5
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
• Original Size (page 6-2) • Original Image (page 6-18) • Border Erase (page 6-26)
• Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) • Scan Resolution (page 6-20) • Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
• 2-sided/Book Original
(page 6-11)
• Color Selection (page 6-23) • Job Finish Notice (page 6-35)
• Original Orientation (page 6-12) • Sharpness (page 6-21) • File Name Entry (page 6-28)
• Storing Size (page 7-4) • Background Density Adj.
(page 6-22)
• File Format (page 6-14)
• Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) • Zoom (page 6-6) • Text Stamp (page 6-38)
• Density (page 6-19) • Centering (page 6-7) • Bates Stamp (page 6-39)
Document Box
7-26
Removing USB Memory
Remove the USB memory.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1Press the Document Box key.
2
Press [Removable Memory].
3Press [Remove Memory].
4Press [OK], and remove the USB memory after
Removable Memory can be safely removed. is
displayed.
NOTE: USB memory can also be removed after
checking the status of the device.
For details, refer to Check of Device Status, on page 8-
14.
Status
DetailDelete
Memory
Information
001/999
Name Date and Time Size
Remove
Memory
Print
Document MB1
Document MB3
Document MB4
Document MB1
Document MB2
2010/10/10 09:30
2010/10/10 09:40
2010/10/10 09:50
2010/10/10 10:00
2010/10/10 10:05
Removable Memory
Store FileOpen
Custom Box Job Box Removable
Memory
FAX Box
Up
1
2
3
4
5
Program
10/10/2010 10:10
8-1
8 Status / Job Cancel
This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being
processed or waiting to be printed.
This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the
status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication.
• Checking Job Status ...........................................................................8-2
• Checking Job History..........................................................................8-9
• Pause and Resumption of Jobs........................................................8-11
• Canceling of Jobs .............................................................................8-11
• Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .....................................................8-12
• Reordering Print Jobs .......................................................................8-12
•
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
.....8-13
• Device/Communication.....................................................................8-14
Status / Job Cancel
8-2
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting status of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in three different screens -
Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job status are available.
Displaying Status Screens
Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2The Status screen appears. Press either [Printing
Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to check
the status.
To check the scheduled transmission job, press
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
For an explanation of the screen, refer to Details of
the Status Screens on page 8-3.
Screen Job status to be displayed
Printing Jobs • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing data from removable memory
• Application
• Job Report /List
Sending Jobs • FAX transmission
• i-FAX transmission
•E-mail
•Folder
• Application
• Multiple destination
• Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Storing Jobs • Scan
•FAX
•i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document
Log
abc@def.com
438 14:47
1/1
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Detail
InProcess
Status
User NameJob NameType
Accepted Time
Job No.
Cancel
Job Type All
Status
Status
Scheduled Job
Priority
Override
Status / Job Cancel
8-3
8
Details of the Status Screens
The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows.
For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status Screens on page 8-2.
Printing Jobs
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.
doc20081010091015 InProcess
000001
doc20081010091510 Waiting
000002
AAAAA
AAAAA
Pause All
Print Jobs
Cancel Priority
Override
Move Up
Status
Status
Status Log
Job Type All
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
1/1
Detail
Paper/Supplies
Device/
Communication
Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs
10/10 09:10
10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 WaitingBBBBB
10/10/2010 10:10
123 4 5 6
7
8910 1211
No. Item / Key Detail
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
3 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Data from Removable Memory
Application job
Report / List
4 Job Name Job Name or file name
5 User Name User Name for the executed job
6 Status Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to print.
Printing: Printing
Waiting: Print Waiting
Pause: Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job
Status / Job Cancel
8-4
7 [ ] of Job Type Sorts by specific type of job
8 [Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.
9 [Cancel] Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.
10 [Priority Override] Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
(Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 8-12)
11 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and
press this key.
(Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 8-12)
12 [Detail] Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list, and
press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of
Histories on page 8-10)
No. Item / Key Detail
Status / Job Cancel
8-5
8
Sending Jobs
The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.
Log
abc@def.com
438 14:47
1/1
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Detail
InProcess
Status
User NameJob NameType
Accepted Time
Job No.
Cancel
Job Type All
Status
Status
Scheduled Job
Priority
Override
12 3 4 5 6
7
810
9
No. Item / Key Detail
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
3 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
Sending Job i-FAX
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Folder
Sending Job Application
Sending Job Multiple
4 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address,
or server name)
5 User Name User Name for the executed job
6 Status Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during
scanning originals
Sending: Sending
Waiting: Sending Waiting
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job
7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9 [Priority Override] Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
* Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
10 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 8-10)
Status / Job Cancel
8-6
Storing Jobs
The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.
Status Log
All
Job No. Accepted Time Type
doc20070225144758
User Name Status
InProcess438 14:47
Job Name
1/1
Cancel Detail
Job Type
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
123456
7
89
No. Display / Key Details
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
3 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
Storing Job i-FAX
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
4 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.
5 User Name User Name for the executed job
6 Status Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing: Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job
7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 8-10)
Status / Job Cancel
8-7
8
Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs
Check the detailed information of each job.
Use the procedure below to check a job's information.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing
Jobs].
To check the scheduled transmission, press
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
3Select the job whose details you wish to check from
the list, and press [Detail].
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of
information.
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by
pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination.
Log
abc@def.com
438 14:47
1/1
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Detail
InProcess
Status
User NameJob NameType
Accepted Time
Job No.
Cancel
Job Type All
Status
Status
Scheduled Job
Priority
Override
Detail Job No.:
Close
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Job Type: Destination:
User Name:
Job Name:
Accepted Time:
1/2
Sending Job - E-mail
Processing000080
User1
ABCDE
doc20070404115151
10:10:10
000080
Detail
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Detail Job No.:
Close
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Job Type: Destination:
User Name:
Job Name:
Accepted Time:
1/2
Sending Job - E-mail
Processing000080
User1
ABCDE
doc20070404115151
10:10:10
000080
Detail
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Status / Job Cancel
8-8
Status/Destination is displayed when address is
selected. Press [Detail] to display the list.
Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press
[Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for
checking.
4To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
Detail Job No.:
Close
Job Type
DestinationType Status
1/2
User01
doc20070404131415
000081
Detail
All
Sending
Waiting
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Status / Job Cancel
8-9
8
Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE: Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KMnet Viewer from the computer.
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The
following job histories are available.
Displaying Job History Screen
The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press either [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or
[Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].
Screen Job histories to be displayed
Printing Jobs • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Job Report / List
• Printing data from removable memory
Sending Jobs • FAX
•i-FAX
•E-mail
• Folder
• Application
• Multiple destination
Storing Jobs • Scan
•FAX
•i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document
Status Log
All
Job No. End Date Type
doc20070225141427
User Name Result
Completed000080 01/25 14:14
Status
Job Name
1/1
Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
doc20070225142253 Completed000081 01/25 14:22
doc20070225142310 Completed000082 01/25 14:23
doc20070225142458 Error000083 01/25 14:24
doc20070225143034 Completed000084 01/25 14:30
Job Type
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs
Detail
10/10/2010 10:10
Status / Job Cancel
8-10
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
Check the detailed information of each history.
Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history
Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing
Jobs] and then [Log].
3Select the job to check details from the list, and
press [Detail].
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous
page, press [ ] or [ ].
4To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
Status Log
All
Job No. End Date Type
doc20070225141427
User Name Result
Completed000080 01/25 14:14
Status
Job Name
1/1
Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
doc20070225142253 Completed000081 01/25 14:22
doc20070225142310 Completed000082 01/25 14:23
doc20070225142458 Error000083 01/25 14:24
doc20070225143034 Completed000084 01/25 14:30
Job Type
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs
Detail
10/10/2010 10:10
Status / Job Cancel
8-11
8
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs
Status screen. Printing is paused.
3When resuming the printing of jobs that have been
paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
For more information on canceling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-52.
doc20081010091015 InProcess
000001
doc20081010091510 Waiting
000002
AAAAA
AAAAA
Pause All
Print Jobs
Cancel Priority
Override
Move Up
Status
Status
Status Log
Job Type All
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
1/1
Detail
Paper/Supplies
Device/
Communication
Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs
10/10 09:10
10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 WaitingBBBBB
10/10/2010 10:10
Status / Job Cancel
8-12
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Printing Jobs].
3Select the job to be given priority, and press
[Priority Override].
4Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current
job in printing is suspended, and the job for
override printing starts.
5When the Priority Override is completed, the
printing job that has been suspended will be
resumed.
Reordering Print Jobs
This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.
The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.
1Press the Status/Cancel key.
2Press the [Printing Jobs].
3Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and
press [Move Up].
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 .
To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up]
again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority
increases by 1.
doc20081010091015 InProcess
000001
doc20081010091510 Waiting
000002
AAAAA
AAAAA
Pause All
Print Jobs
Cancel Priority
Override
Move Up
Status
Status
Status Log
Job Type All
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
1/1
Detail
Paper/Supplies
Device/
Communication
Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs
10/10 09:10
10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 WaitingBBBBB
10/10/2010 10:10
doc20081010091015 InProcess
000001
doc20081010091510 Waiting
000002
AAAAA
AAAAA
Pause All
Print Jobs
Cancel Priority
Override
Move Up
Status
Status
Status Log
Job Type All
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
1/1
Detail
Paper/Supplies
Device/
Communication
Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs
10/10 09:10
10/10 09:15
000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 WaitingBBBBB
10/10/2010 10:10
Status / Job Cancel
8-13
8
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Paper/Supplies].Check the remaining
amount of toner and the status of the waste toner
box in Toner Information, and the remaining
amount of paper in each paper source in Paper.
The items you can check are described below.
Remaining amount of toner
You can check the remaining amount of each color toner levels from 100 to 0% (1% increments).
Status of the waste toner box
You can check the status of waste toner box.
Paper
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source.The remaining
amount of paper is shown by 5 levels as 100, 75, 50, 25, and 0%, however, the paper in the multi purpose tray
is shown by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.
Others
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
NOTE: If the optional document finisher and punch unit are installed, the Others section provides the status of
the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available.
Toner Information Paper Others
Toner Status Size Type Status Type Status
Black (K) A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Staple A OK
100%
Waste Toner OK
Status
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Cyan (C)
Magenta (M)
Yellow (Y) 100%
100%
100%
10/10/2010 10:10
A4
A4
A4
Plain
Plain
Plain
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Status / Job Cancel
8-14
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.
Displaying Device/Communication Screen
The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Device/Communication].
The screen to check the status or configure the
devices is displayed.
Check of Device Status
The items you can check are described below.
Scanner
The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam,
opened cover, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.
Hard Disk
The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.
Ready.
Scanner
Ready.
Printer
Not connected.
Removable Memory
Hard Disk
Format Remove
Line Off Manual RX
FAX Port 1
LogFAX Check New FAX
i-FAX
FAX Port 2
Line Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Status
Dialing... Receiving...
Overwriting...
Status / Job Cancel
8-15
8
Configuring the Devices
Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.
Removable Memory (USB Memory)
• The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
• Press [Format] to format external media.
CAUTION: When [Format] is pressed, all data in the external media is erased.
• Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the
next section.
FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2
• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
• Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX Communication on
page 8-16 in the section afterwards.
• Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the
fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
• Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
Ready.
Scanner
Ready.
Printer
Not connected.
Removable Memory
Hard Disk
Format Remove
Line Off Manual RX
FAX Port 1
LogFAX Check New FAX
i-FAX
FAX Port 2
Line Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Status
Dialing... Receiving...
Overwriting...
Status / Job Cancel
8-16
Removing the USB Memory
There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.
Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in
Removable Memory.
3When Removable memory can be safely removed.
is displayed, remove the USB memory.
Canceling FAX Communication
Cancel fax communication.
Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
2Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX
Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
3Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is
disconnected, and the fax communication is
canceled.
Ready.
Scanner
Ready.
Printer
Not connected.
Removable Memory
Hard Disk
Format Remove
Line Off Manual RX
FAX Port 1
LogFAX Check New FAX
i-FAX
FAX Port 2
Line Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Status
Dialing... Receiving...
Overwriting...
Ready.
Scanner
Ready.
Printer
Not connected.
Removable Memory
Hard Disk
Format Remove
Line Off Manual RX
FAX Port 1
LogFAX Check New FAX
i-FAX
FAX Port 2
Line Off
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication Paper/Supplies
Status
Dialing... Receiving...
Overwriting...
9-1
9 Default Setting (System Menu)
This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on
the operation panel.
• Common Settings ...............................................................................9-2
• Copy..................................................................................................9-41
• Send..................................................................................................9-44
• Document Box/Removable Memory .................................................9-53
• Printer ...............................................................................................9-55
• Report ...............................................................................................9-62
• Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................9-66
• Date/Timer ........................................................................................9-74
• Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) ...............9-79
• Internet..............................................................................................9-86
• Application ........................................................................................9-88
• System Initialization ..........................................................................9-91
• Restart Entire Device........................................................................9-91
• Network.............................................................................................9-92
• Interface Block Setting....................................................................9-104
• Security Level .................................................................................9-105
• Document Guard.............................................................................9-105
• Data Security ..................................................................................9-107
• Optional Function............................................................................9-109
• Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ....................9-110
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-2
Common Settings
Common settings include;
• Language …9-2
• Default Screen …9-3
• Sound …9-4
• Original/Paper Settings …9-4
• Measurement …9-12
• Error Handling …9-13
• Paper Output …9-15
• Orientation Confirmation …9-16
• Color Toner Empty Action …9-16
• Function Defaults …9-16
• USB Keyboard Type …9-30
• System Stamp …9-30
• Manual Staple …9-39
• Customize Status Display …9-40
• Low Toner Alert Level …9-40
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Language
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to select the language.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language.
3Press the key for the language you want to use.
4Press [OK].
The touch panel language will be changed.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-3
9
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.
The table below lists the available screens.
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen.
3Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen.
NOTE: The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on.
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed)
appears.
Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed)
appears.
FAX*
*
This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
The Fax screen (the screen shown when the Fax key is pressed)
appears.
Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/
Job Cancel key is pressed) appears.
Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document
Box key is pressed) appears.
Program The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is
pressed) appears.
Application The Application selecting screen (the screen shown when the
Application key is pressed) appears.
Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen) appears.
Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen) appears.
Accessibility FAX* The Accessibility Fax screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Faxscreen) appears.
Application name
(Maximum 5 applications)
For example, Internet Browser
Each application is activated and the initial screen appears.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-4
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details.
Use the procedure below to set the sound options.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.
3Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job Finish, Ready, Warning, or USB Keyboard.
4Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.
Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.
Custom Original Size
Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select
original size. The dimensions available are as follows.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Item Value Description
Volume 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to
5 (Maximum)
Set the buzzer volume level.
Key Confirmation Off, On Emit a sound when the control panel
and touch panel keys are pressed.
Job Finish Off, On,
FAX Reception Only*
*
This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Emit a sound when a print job is
normally completed.
Ready Off, On Emit a sound when the warm-up is
completed.
Warning Off, On Emit a sound when errors occur.
USB Keyboard Off, On Emit a sound when a USB keyboard is
operated.
Input units Dimensions
Inch models X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-5
9
Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size.
3Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you wish to register the size.
4Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
5Press [OK].
6Move to the copy, send, or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Custom Paper Size
Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the
screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Up to four custom paper sizes can be added.
Select media type for each paper size.
Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 for Custom 1-8 for the media type.
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size.
3Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you want to register the size.
4Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
5Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.
6Press [OK].
7Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Input units Dimensions
Inch models H: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-6
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes (Cassette Setting)
Select paper sizes and media types for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 to 7).
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types for each cassette.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette
1 to Cassette 7, on which you want to register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size.
3To detect the paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size.
4Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
5Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].
Item Description
Paper
Size
Auto Automatically detect the paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1*
* Only A4, Letter, and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) and
the optional Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) are used.
Available options are as follows:
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2*
Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
216×340 mm
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II,
8K, 16K, 16K-R
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough**, Vellum** (60 to 105 g/m2 or less),
Recycled, Preprint***, Bond**, Color**, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**, High Quality, Custom 1-8**
** To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. When the paper
weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
• Rough: Heavy 5 • Vellum: Heavy 5
• Preprinted: Heavy 5 • Color: Heavy 5
• Letterhead: Heavy 5 • Thick: Heavy 5
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 5, or Extra Heavy
On the 30/30 ppm model and 35/35 ppm model, the paper of each also cannot be selected when
Heavy 4 is set.
*** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-7
9
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting)
Select the sizes and media types for the multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used sizes and media types before
use.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8
Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types for manual paper feed.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change]
of Paper Size.
3To detect the paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.
To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size.
If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
Press [# Keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys.
4Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
Item Description
Paper
Size
Auto Automatically detect the paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Standard
Sizes 1
Available options are as follows:
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II,
Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 216×340 mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 12×18", Oficio II,
Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope
#6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki, Oufuku hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
* Refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9-5 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for Custom Paper Size.
Size
Entry
Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Inch models:
H: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models:
H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less),
Labels, Recycled, Preprint**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8**
** Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-8
5Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].
Media Type Setting
Select the weight for each media type. The options for the media type and weight of paper are as follows.
Paper types and weights
Y: Available N: Not available
Paper
Weight Light*
* The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled varies depending on the paper weight. For details, refer to 1,000-sheet
Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-28, and 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-29.
Normal
1*
Normal
2*
Normal
3*
Heavy
1* Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Heavy 4 Heavy 5 Extra
Heavy
Weight (g/m
2
),
Media type
52 g/m2
to
59 g/m2
60 g/m2
to
75 g/m2
76 g/m2
to
90 g/m2
91 g/m2
to
105 g/m
2
106 g/m
2
to
135 g/m
2
136
g/m
2
to
163
g/m
2
164 g/m
2
to
220 g/m
2
221 g/m
2
to
256 g/m
2
257 g/m
2
to
300 g/m
2
Trans-
paren-
cies
Plain NY
(default)
YYNNNNNN
Rough NYYY
(default)
YYYYYN
Vellum NY
(default)
YYYYYYYN
Labels NY** Y** Y** Y** Y**
(default)
** The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.
Y** Y** Y** N
Recycled NY
(default)
YYNNNNNN
Preprinted NYYYY
(default)
YYYY***
*** A media type set for [Cassette 1] to [Cassette 7] cannot be set.
N
Bond NYYY
(default)
YYYYNN
Cardstock NNNNY**Y**
(default)
Y** Y ** Y** N
Color NY
(default)
YYYYYYYN
Prepunched NY
(default)
YYNNNNNN
Letterhead NYYYY
(default)
YYYY***N
Thick NNNNY
(default)
YYYY***N
Envelope NNNNY**Y**
(default)
Y** Y** Y** N
Coated NY**Y ** Y**
(defaut)
Y** Y** Y** Y** Y**,*** N
High Quality NY
(default)
YYYNNNNN
Transparenci
es
NNNNNNNNNY**
(default)
Custom 1-8 YY
(default)
YYYYYYY***N
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-9
9
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting.
3Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change.
4Press [Change] of Paper Weight.
5Select the weight and press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
6Press [Close].
7To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change]
of Duplex. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
8Press [Close].
9To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. Enter the
name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-7 and Multi Purpose Tray.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 7] are displayed when the following options are installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet), side feeder (500-sheet x 3), or large capacity side feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 6]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is
installed
[Cassette 7]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
Item Description
Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.
Permit Duplex printing allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more
than 15 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose
tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-10
Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source.
3Select a paper cassette for the default setting.
4Press [OK].
5Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only)
Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes.
Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect.
3Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki.
Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15"
respectively.
4Press [OK].
Media for Auto (Color/B&W)
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection. If Plain is
selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for
the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
NOTE: Default media types can be set for both Color and Black and White.
Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types used by Auto Selection.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (Color)
or Media for Auto (B & W).
3Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection.
4Press [OK].
Item Description
A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.
Folio Select Folio for automatic detection.
11x15" Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-11
9
Paper Source for Cover
Select the paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-7 or Multi Purpose Tray. Covers are used for Booklet
(see page 4-20) and Cover (see page 4-22) modes.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 7] are displayed when the following options are installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet), side feeder (500-sheet x 3), or large capacity side feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
[Cassette 6]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is
installed
[Cassette 7]: When a side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) is installed
Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Paper Source for
Cover.
3Select the paper source to load cover paper.
4Press [OK].
Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a
case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].
The table below lists the available settings and their details.
Item Description
Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to
print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.
Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation.
Select this item when paper orientation is not important.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-12
If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward.
Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Special Paper
Action.
3Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority].
4Press [OK].
Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Use the procedure below to change the input units.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement.
3Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch.
4Press [OK].
Original
Original
Finished
Finished
Cassette
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Multi Purpose Tray
Paper
Paper
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-13
9
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when an error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for
the errors are as follows.
Duplexing Error
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media types.
Finishing Error
Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or
media type.
No Staple Error
Select what to do when staples run out during printing.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
Finished Pages Exceeded
Select what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during printing.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
Item Description
1-sided Printed in 1-sided
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues without finishing.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-14
Punch Waste Full Error
Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 4,000-sheet finisher and a hole punch unit are installed.
Paper Mismatch Error
Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified
paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Inserted Paper Mismatch
Select what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match the actual paper size
that is fed.
Paper Jam before Staple
The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with stapling can be selected.
NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1,000-sheet finisher or 4,000-sheet finisher is installed.
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling.
3Press [Change] at the error for which you wish to change the handling.
4Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK].
5The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues without punching.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Ignore Detection does not take place and the job is printed.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Resume at Top of
Page
Resume printing from the first page of the document.
Resume at Jammed
Page
Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-15
9
Paper Output
Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box, computers, and FAX RX data. The
options are as follows.
NOTE: The optional inner job separator, right job separator, 1,000-sheet finisher, and 4,000-sheet finisher are
required.
When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to select the output tray.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output.
3Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed.
If you have 2 optional fax kits installed, Fax Port 2 appears. You can specify the output tray for the second kit
(Dual FAX).
4Select the Output Tray.
5When changing the output tray of Copy/Custom Box, move to the copy or document box screen and press
the Reset key.
Output Tray Descriptions
Inner Tray*
* This cannot be selected when the optional document finisher is installed.
Delivery on the Inner Tray of the machine.
Tray A, Tray B, Tray C Delivery to trays A - C of the optional 4,000-sheet finisher.
Finisher Left Tray
Finisher TOP Tray
Delivery to the left tray or top tray of the optional 1,000-sheet finisher.
Right Tray Delivery to the optional right job separator.
Job Separator Tray* Delivery to the optional inner job separator.
Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray).
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-16
Orientation Confirmation
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when
using the following functions. (For more information, refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.)
Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation.
3Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Color Toner Empty Action
Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color
toner runs out.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed when there is no color toner.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and then [Change] of Color Toner Empty Action.
3Select [Stop Printing] or [Print in Black & White].
4Press [OK].
IMPORTANT: You cannot change the setting to black and white printing by selecting [Print in Black & White]
once the color toner runs out. If you want to use [Print in Black & White], specify the action before the color toner
runs out.
Once the color toner runs out, the machine continues printing in black and white up to 2,000 pages for 30/30
ppm and 35/35 ppm models, and 4,000 pages for 45/45 ppm and 55/50 ppm models in A4/Letter size.
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
• Zoom (XY Zoom) • Page numbering
• Duplex • Booklets
• Margin/Centering originals • Staple/Punch (optional feature)
• Border erase • 2-sided/Book Original
• Combine mode • Text Stamp
• Memo mode • Bates Stamp
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-17
9
Original Orientation
Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation.
3Select [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] for the default.
4Press [OK].
Original Image (Copy)
Select the default original document type for copying. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
Top Edge on Top Select the original's top edge at the top.
Top Edge on Left Select the original's top edge at the left.
Item Description
Text+Photo (Printer) For mixed text and photo documents printed on this machine
originally.
Text+Photo (Magazine) For mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo (Printer) For photos printed on this machine originally.
Photo (Magazine) For photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo (Photo Paper) For photos taken with a camera.
Text Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Text (Fine Line)
Graphic/Map (Printer) For maps and diagrams printed on this machine originally.
Graphic/Map (Magazine) For maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-18
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image (Copy).
3Select the default original document type.
4Press [OK].
Org. Image (Send/Store)
Select the default original document type for sending and storing in a document box. The available default
settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Org. Image (Send/Store).
3Select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text] or [Text (for OCR)] for the default.
4Press [OK].
Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal.
Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution.
3Select the default resolution.
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Text+Photo Text and photos together.
Photo For photos taken with a camera.
Text Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Text (for OCR) Image quality suitable for OCR software.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-19
9
Color Selection (Copy)
Select the default copying color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2
Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of
Function Defaults
and then [Change] of
Color Selection(Copy)
.
3Select the default color setting.
4Press [OK].
Color Selection (Send/Store)
Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The available default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Select.(Send/Store).
3Select the default color mode.
4Press [OK].
Color mode Description
Auto Color Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black
and white.
Full Color Scan document in full color.
Black & White Scan document in black and white.
Color mode Description
Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Black and White.
Full Color Scan document in full color.
Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.
Black & White Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full
Color or Grayscale.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-20
File Format
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-14 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file format.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format.
3Select the default file format.
4Press [OK].
File Separation
Select the default file separation setting. The available default settings are shown below.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-15 for file separation.
Use the procedure below to select the default file separation.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Separation.
3Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
PDF Send files in PDF format.
TIFF Send files in TIFF format.
JPEG Send files in JPEG format.
XPS Send files in XPS format.
High Comp. PDF Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer to page 6-16).
Item Description
Off No file separation performed (all the pages are compiled in one file).
Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-21
9
Backgrnd Density (Copy)
Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy). The available default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Backgrnd Density
(Copy).
3Select the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
4Press [OK].
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store)
Select the default background density for sending and storing in a document box. The available default settings
are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default BackgrndDens.(Send/Store).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store).
3Select the default BackgrndDens.(Send/Store).
4Press [OK].
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy)
Set the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy).
Item Description
Off Do not adjust background density.
Auto Set to auto adjustment.
Manual (Darker 5) Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.
Item Description
Off Do not adjust background density.
Auto Set to auto adjustment.
Manual (Darker 5) Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.
Item Description
Off Do not reduce show-through.
On Reduce show-through.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-22
Use the procedure below to select the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Prevent Bleed-thru
(Copy).
3Set the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy).
4Press [OK].
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store)
Set the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).
Use the procedure below to select the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Prevent Bleed(Send/
Store).
3Set the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).
4Press [OK].
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default settings when paper size/sending size is changed after the originals are set.
The available default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] three times and then [Change] of Zoom.
3Select the default zoom setting.
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Off Do not reduce show-through.
On Reduce show-through.
Item Description
100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).
Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match the paper
size/ sending size.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-23
9
Border Erase Default
Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-18 and page 6-26 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default.
3Press [+] or [–] for the Border and Gutter width to erase.
You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.
4Press [OK].
Border Erase to Back Page
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-18 and page 6-26 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back side of the original page.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase to Back
Page.
3Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
4Press [OK].
Input units Range
Inch 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Item Description
Same as Front Page Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page
Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-24
Margin Default
Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Margin Default.
3Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/Right and Top/Bottom.
You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.
4Press [OK].
Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-44 for Auto Image Rotation.
Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation.
3Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-14 for EcoPrint.
Input units Range
Inch -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Item Description
Off No Auto Image Rotation performed.
On Auto Image Rotation performed.
Item Description
Off No EcoPrint performed.
On EcoPrint performed.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-25
9
Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] twice, and then [Change] of EcoPrint.
3Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
4Press [OK].
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). One of five levels [1] - [5] can be set.
NOTE: Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] twice, and then [Change] of Toner
SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
3Select from [1] to [5] for the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
4Press [OK].
High Comp. PDF Image
Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for high compression PDF files.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of High
Comp. PDF Image.
3Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size.
Standard Standard quality
Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-26
Color TIFF Compression
Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. Use the procedure below to set the
default Color TIFF Compression setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Color
TIFF Compression.
3Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
4Press [OK].
Image Quality (File Format)
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS file quality. Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.)
to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.).
NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.
Refer to page 6-14 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of
Image Quality (File Format).
3Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality).
4Press [OK].
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 3-15 for Collate/Offset.
Item Description
Collate Off Collate not performed.
On Collate performed.
Offset Off Offset not performed.
Each Set
(Each Page)
Offset performed. (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is
performed [Each Page].)
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-27
9
Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Collate/Offset.
3Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively.
4Press [OK].
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of JPEG/TIFF
Print.
3Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution], or [Fit to Print Resolution].
4Press [OK].
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of XPS Fit to
Page.
3Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
4Press [OK].
Continuous Scan
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Refer to page 4-43 for Continuous Scan.
Item Description
Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image.
Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution.
Item Description
Off Continuous scan not performed
On Continuous scan performed
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-28
Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] twice and then [Change] of Continuous
Scan.
3Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
4Press [OK].
PDF/A
Set the PDF file format used on the machine.
Use the procedure below to select the default PDF/A.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] three times and then [Change]
of PDF/A.
3Select [Off], [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b].
4Press [OK].
File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-48 and page 6-28 for name entry.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] three times and then [Change] of File
Name Entry.
3Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4Press [OK].
5Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the job.
The added information will be displayed in Additional Info.
6Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-29
9
E-mail Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail. In addition, set the template for entering the body text. One of three templates can be set.
NOTE: Refer to Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry) on page 3-24.
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] three times, and then [Change] of E-mail
Subject/Body.
3Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4Press [OK].
5Press [Body 1] and enter a maximum of 500 characters for the e-mail body template.
6To register another template, press [Body 2] or [Body 3] and enter a maximum of 500 characters for the
e-mail body template.
7Select the default body text from [Body 1] to [Body 3] in Default Template.
8Press [OK].
9Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].
Repeat Copy
Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is
set to 0.
Refer to page 4-49 for Repeat Copy.
Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] three times and [Change] of
Repeat Copy.
3Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Off No Repeat Copy is performed.
On Repeat Copy is performed.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-30
USB Keyboard Type
Set the type of USB keyboard that is connected.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Change] of USB Keyboard Type.
3Select [US-English], [US-English with Euro], [French] or [German].
4Press [OK].
System Stamp
The following header, footer, and stamp settings can be selected in System Stamp Settings.
Basic
Select displayed stamp settings.
Text (Text Stamp)
Set a Text (Text Stamp). The text set here can be selected as a stamp template during sending.
Use the procedure below to set a Text (Text Stamp).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Add/Edit] in Text (Text
Stamp).
3Select the key in which the print text will be registered, press [Add/Edit], and enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
4Press [OK].
Font (Page #)
When page numbers are used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set a Font (Page #).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Next] in Font (Page #).
3Press [Change] in Size 1 - Size 3, and set the font size.
4Press [OK].
•Basic
• Printing Jobs
• Sending Jobs
• Storing Jobs
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-31
9
Font (Bates Stamp)
When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set a Font (Bates Stamp).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Next] in Font (Bates Stamp).
3Press [Change] in Size 1 - Size 3, and set the font size.
4Press [OK].
Font (Text Stamp)
When a text stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Use the procedure below to set a Font (Text Stamp).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Change] in Font (Text Stamp).
3Press [Change] in Size 1 - Size 3, and set the font size.
4Press [OK].
Printing Jobs
Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.
After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Document Box (Printing a Document) screen
from the system menu, and press the Reset key.
Text Stamp
Select whether or not a text stamp is used.
Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Text
Stamp.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Edit Text Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text
Stamp.
3Press [Keyboard] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string, or select the text stamp to be
printed from the displayed templates.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-32
4Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method for the text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
5Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
6Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
7Press [OK].
Bates Stamp
Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Bates
Stamp.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.
Item Description
Each Print Page Stamp on each printed page.
Each Original Page Stamp each page of the document.
Item Description
Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp.
Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can be
set.
Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can
be set.
Color Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display Pattern Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-33
9
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Bates
Stamp
3Set the bates stamp to print.
Items that can be set are [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number], [Numbering], [Text 1], and [Text 2].
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text
string.
4If you selected [Date] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
Items that can be set are [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], and [YYYY/MM/DD]
5If you set [Numbering] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Numbering Default] and set the starting
sequence number (1 - 9999999).
6Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
7Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the Bates Stamp to be printed.
The following settings can be selected.
8Press [OK].
Item Description
Size Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Style Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color Set the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Display Pattern Set the display method of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-34
Sending Jobs
Configure stamp settings for sending documents.
After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Document Box (Sending Documents) screen
from the system menu, and press the Reset key.
Text Stamp
Select whether or not a text stamp is used.
Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Text
Stamp.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Text Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text
Stamp.
3Press [Keyboard] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string, or select the text stamp to be
printed from the displayed templates.
4Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
5Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
6Press [OK].
Item Description
Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp.
Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set.
Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can
be set.
Color Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display Pattern Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-35
9
Bates Stamp
Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Bates
Stamp.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Sending Jobs > [Change] in Edit Bates
Stamp
3Set the bates stamp to print.
Items that can be set are [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number], [Numbering], [Text 1], and [Text 2].
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text
string.
4If you selected [Date] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
Items that can be set are [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], and [YYYY/MM/DD]
5If you set [Numbering] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Numbering Default] and set the starting
sequence number (1 - 9999999).
6Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-36
7Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the Bates Stamp to be printed.
The following settings can be selected.
8Press [OK].
Storing Jobs
Configure stamp settings for storing documents in removable memory.
After configuring the setting, return to the Document Box (Storing Documents) screen from the system menu,
and press the Reset key.
Text Stamp
Select whether or not a text stamp is used.
Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Text
Stamp.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Item Description
Size Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Style Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color Set the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Display Pattern Set the display method of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-37
9
Edit Text Stamp
Set the default text stamp.
Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text
Stamp.
3Press [Keyboard] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string, or select the text stamp to be
printed from the displayed templates.
4Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
5Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp.
The following settings can be selected.
6Press [OK].
Bates Stamp
Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Bates
Stamp.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.
Item Description
Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp.
Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Bold] or [Italic] can be
set.
Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can
be set.
Color Set the color of the printed text stamp. [Black], [Cyan], [Magenta],
[Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp.
Display Pattern Set the display method of the printed text stamp. [Transparent],
[Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-38
Edit Bates Stamp
Set the default Bates Stamp.
Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Storing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Bates
Stamp
3Set the bates stamp to print.
Items that can be set are [Date], [User Name], [Serial Number], [Numbering], [Text 1], and [Text 2].
If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2], press [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text
string.
4If you selected [Date] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Date Format] and set the date display format.
Items that can be set are [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], and [YYYY/MM/DD]
5If you set [Numbering] for the bates stamp to be printed, press [Numbering Default] and set the starting
sequence number (1 - 9999999).
6Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp.
Positions that can be selected are [Top Left], [Top Middle], [Top Right], [Middle Left], [Center], [Middle Right],
[Bottom Left], [Bottom Middle], and [Bottom Right].
7Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the Bates Stamp to be printed.
The following settings can be selected.
8Press [OK].
Item Description
Size Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Style Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bold] or [Italic]
can be set.
Font Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Courier] or [Letter
Gothic] can be set.
Color Set the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Black], [Cyan],
[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] can be set.
Density Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
Display Pattern Set the display method of the Bates Stamp to be printed.
[Transparent], [Clipping], or [Overwrite] can be selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-39
9
Manual Staple
The following settings can be configured in the manual staple settings.
NOTE: When a 4,000-sheet finisher is not installed, these settings cannot be configured.
Manual Staple
Select whether or not to set the setting for Manual Staple. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select the default setting for Manual Staple.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in Manual Staple > [Change] in Manual Staple.
3Select the default setting for Manual Staple.
4If you selected [On] in 3, set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically cancelled.
5Press [OK].
Staple Position
Set the default Staple Position. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select the default Staple Position.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in Manual Staple > [Change] in Staple Position.
3Select [A4 Long Edge] or [Letter Long Edge].
4Press [OK].
• Manual Staple
• Staple Position
Item Description
Off Manual stapling cannot be used.
On Manual stapling can be used.
Item Description
A4 Long Edge Staple on the long side of A4 size.
Letter Long Edge Staple on the long side of letter size.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-40
Customize Status Display
Set the items that appear in the print job status screen. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select the default Customize Status Display.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in Customize Status Display.
3Select [Change] in Printing Job Column 1 or Printing Job Column 2.
4Select [Job Name], [User Name], or [Printed Pages x Copies].
5Press [OK].
Low Toner Alert Level
Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner. The setting range is 5 to 100% (increments of 1%).
Selecting [Off] alerts you low toner when the amount of remaining toner becomes 5%.
The procedure for setting the Low Toner Alert Level is explained below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Change] in Low Toner Alert Level.
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press [Login].
For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page
10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4If you selected [On], set the toner level at which notification takes place with [+], [-] or the numeric keys.
5Press [OK].
Item Description
Job Name Display the job name.
User Name Display the user name.
Printed Pages x
Copies
Display the number of pages of the print job and number of copies.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-41
9
Copy
The following settings are available for copying functions.
• Paper Selection …9-41
• Auto Paper Selection …9-42
• Auto % Priority …9-42
• Reserve Next Priority …9-43
• Preset Limit …9-43
• Quick Setup Registration …9-43
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection.
3Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source].
4Press [OK].
5Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.
Item Description
Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as
originals.
Default Paper Source Select the paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 9-
9).
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-42
Auto Paper Selection
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table
below shows the available settings.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection.
3Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original Size].
4Press [OK].
5Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/
zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings.
IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press
the Reset key.
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority.
3Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
5Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.
Item Description
Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.
Item Description
Off No zoom performed (copied in original size).
On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-43
9
Reserve Next Priority
Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs.
Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority.
3Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.
Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit.
3Press [+] or [–] or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies.
4Press [OK].
Quick Setup Registration
Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available.
Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/Offset, Original Image,
Original Size, Original Orientation, Continuous Scan, Color Selection, Background Density Adj.
NOTE:
Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3-53 for the Quick Setup steps.
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
4Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.
5Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-44
Send
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.
• Quick Setup Registration …9-44
• Dest. Check before Send …9-44
• Color Type …9-45
• Entry Check for New Dest. …9-45
• Default Screen …9-46
• Send and Forward …9-46
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Quick Setup Registration
Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation, File Format, Density, Original Image,
Scan Resolution, FAX TX Resolution, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
4Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.
5Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
Dest. Check before Send
When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key.
The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-29 for the Quick Setup steps.
Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] and then [Change] of Dest. Check before Send.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Off Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations.
On Display the confirmation screen of destinations.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-45
9
Color Type
Set the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
Use the procedure below to set the color type.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] and then [Change] of Color Type.
3Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
4Press [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest.
When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. The table below
shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set entry check for new destination.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] and then [Change] of Entry Check for New Dest..
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
RGB Send color documents in RGB.
sRGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB.
Item Description
Off Do not display the entry check screen.
On Display the entry check screen.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-46
Default Screen
Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set the default send screen.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] and then [Change] of Default Screen.
3Press [Destination] or [Address Book].
4Press [OK].
Send and Forward
You can set whether transmission copies are forwarded to a specified address when documents are sent. The
table below shows the available settings.
Forward
Set whether or not transmission copies are forwarded. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set the settings for Forward.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Forward.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Select the type of address to be specified as a forwarding destination and press [OK].
Item Detail
Destination Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed
(screen for sending).
Address Book Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed
• Forward • File Format
• Destination • File Separation
• Color Setting • E-mail Subject
• Scan Resolution • FTP Encrypted TX
Item Detail
Off Do not forward transmission copies.
On Forward transmission copies.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-47
9
Destination
Set the address to which transmission copies are to be forwarded.
Use the procedure below to set the default Destination.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Destination.
3To specify the forwarding destination from the address book, press [Address Book]. To specify by entering
an e-mail address, press [E-mail Addr Entry]. To specify a folder, press [Folder Path Entry].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying an address from the address book
Select the address to be specified as a forwarding destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
Specifying by entering an e-mail address
Press [E-mail Address], enter the e-mail address, and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Specifying a folder
Select [FTP] or [SMB], press [Host Name], [Path], [Login User Name], and [Login Password], enter each
item, and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
* If you specify a port number other than the default (FTP: 21, SMB: 139), use the "Host name: port
number" format.
(e.g., FTPhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Item Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name* Host name or IP address of server or computer to be sent to. 64
Path Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "User\ScanData") 128
Login User Name User name server login
Domain Name\User Name (e.g., "abcdnet\james.smith")
64
Login Password Password for server login 64
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-48
To search for and register a folder on a PC on the network, press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network].
If you pressed [Search SMB Host], enter the "Domain/Workgroup" and "Host Name" to search the PCs on
the network.
If you pressed [Windows Network], all PCs on the network are searched. A maximum of 500 addresses can
be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears, and
press [Next]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. After you enter the login user
name and login password name, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and
press [Next]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
4Check if the destination entry is correct and press [OK]. The destination is added to the Address Book.
Color Setting
Color settings for forwarded transmission copies can be set.
The settings are described below.
NOTE: All jobs sent by Network FAX are forwarded in black & white.
Use the procedure below to set the default Color setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Color setting.
3Select the scanning color mode.
4Press [OK].
Item Detail
Auto Color
(Color/Gray)
Automatically select full color or grayscale.
Auto Color
(Color/B & W)
Automatically select full color or black & white.
Full Color Forward in full color.
Grayscale Forward in grayscale.
Black & White Forward in black & white.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-49
9
Scan Resolution
The resolution of forwarded copies can be set. The options are 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 600x600dpi.
NOTE: Jobs sent by Network FAX are sent in the same resolution as the resolution for fax transmission.
Use the procedure below to set the default Scan Resolution.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of Scan Resolution.
3Select the resolution.
4Press [OK].
File Format
Select the file format of forwarded transmission copies. The table below lists the file formats and their details.
NOTE: When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality.
You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions.
File Format Adjustable range of image
quality Color Setting
PDF*
* The file format can be set to [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b].
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full
Color, Grayscale
XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
High Comp.
PDF*
1 Compression Ratio Priority
to 3 Quality Priority
Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto
Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-50
Use the procedure below to set the default File Format.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of File Format.
3Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption and PDF/A settings.
NOTE: If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
4Press [OK].
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying,
printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of File Format.
3Press [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and [Encryption].
4Press [ ] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 3.0 and later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
5When you enter the password to open the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Open Document.
6Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again for confirmation. Then press [OK].
8When you enter the password to edit the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.
9In the same way as the entry of Password to Open Document, enter the password to change the PDF file.
Item Value Detail
Compatibility Acrobat 3.0 or later,
Acrobat 5.0 or later
Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.
Password to
Open
Document
Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file
Password to
Edit/Print
Document
Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-51
9
10
Press [Detail].
11
Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [ ] of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of limit).
The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
12
Press [ ] of Changes Allowed, and select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs
according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
13
From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select [Disable] or [Enable].
The table below shows the available settings.
14
Press [OK].
Item Detail
Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible
Allowed (Low Resolution
only)*
* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Can print the PDF file only in low resolution
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution
Item Detail
Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file
Inserting/Deleting/
Rotating Pages*
* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
PDF file
Commenting Can only add commenting
Layout except extracting
Pages**
** Only displayed when [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
Can change the page layout except extracting the
pages of the PDF file
Any except extracting
Pages
Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
of the PDF file
Item Detail
Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-52
File Separation
Set whether transmission copies are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.
Use the procedure below to set the default for File Separation.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of File Separation.
3Press [Off] or [Each Page] to set File Separation.
4Press [OK].
NOTE: A three-digit serial number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the file
name.
E-mail Subject
Set the subject of forwarded e-mails.
Use the procedure below to set the default E-mail Subject.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of E-mail Subject.
3Enter a maximum of 60 characters for the e-mail subject and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
FTP Encrypted TX
Set whether transmission copies are encrypted before being forwarded.
Use the procedure below to set the default FTP Encrypted TX
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Send] > [Next] of Send and Forward > [Change] of FTP Encrypted TX.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When the SSL setting is not enabled, FTP encryption transmission cannot be enabled.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-53
9
Document Box/Removable Memory
The following settings are available for Document Box.
• Custom Box …9-53
• Default Setting …9-53
• Job Box …9-53
• Quick Setup Registration …9-54
Custom Box
Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom box, or deletes a box from the custom
box. For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 7-2.
Default Setting
Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted.
For details, refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 7-3.
Job Box
The following three operations can be done. For details, refer to each page shown below.
•Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 7-15)
•Repeat Copy (page 7-18)
•Deleting a Form Stored (page 7-21)
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-54
Quick Setup Registration
Select the Storing in Box, Sending from Box, Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six
keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
The options are as follows.
Store File Quick Setup
Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Resolution, Zoom,
Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.
Print Quick Setup
Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch, Duplex, Combine, Delete after Printed
Send Quick Setup
Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution, File Format, Delete after Transmitted
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3Press [Next] of Store File, Print, or Send.
4Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
5Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.
6Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-55
9
Printer
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
• Emulation …9-55
• Color Setting …9-56
• Gloss Mode …9-56
• EcoPrint …9-57
• Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) …9-57
• Override A4/Letter …9-57
• Duplex …9-58
• Copies …9-58
• Orientation …9-59
• Form Feed Timeout …9-59
• LF Action …9-60
• CR Action …9-60
•Job Name …9-60
• User Name …9-61
• Paper Feed Mode …9-61
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Emulation
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.
Selection of emulation
The printer can emulate PCL 6, KPDL and KPDL(Auto).
Use the procedure below to select the emulation.
1Press the System Menu Key.
2Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation.
3Select the desired emulation.
NOTE: If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set Alternative Emulation, too. (Refer to page 9-56)
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set KPDL Error Report, too. (Refer to page 9-56)
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-56
Setting of Alternative Emulation
When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and another
emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation
you can set is [PCL6].
Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.
1Press the System Menu Key.
2Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL(Auto)] > [Alt Emulation].
3Select the desired alternative emulation and then press [OK].
4Press [OK].
Setting of KPDL error report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is
output. The default setting is Off (not output).
Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.
1Press the System Menu Key.
2Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)] > [KPDL Error Report].
3Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
4Press [OK].
Color Setting
You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white.
Use the procedure below to select the color setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Color Setting.
3Select [Color] or [Black & White].
4Press [OK].
Gloss Mode
This feature can be used to set the glossiness of printed matter.
Use the procedure below to set the Gloss Mode.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Gloss Mode.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-57
9
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where lighter printing is not a
problem.
Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint)
Select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). One of five levels [1] - [5] can be set.
NOTE: Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Use the procedure below to select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and [Change] of Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
3Select from [1] to [5] for the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).
4Press [OK].
Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table
below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will
use whichever size is in the paper source.
Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-58
Duplex
Select the binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex.
3Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-sided Bind ShortEdge].
4Press [OK].
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies.
3Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.
4Press [OK].
Item Description Finish
1-sided No duplex mode
2-sided Bind
LongEdge
Longer edge bound
2-sided Bind
ShortEdge
Shorter edge bound
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-59
9
Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation.
3Press [Portrait] or [Landscape].
4Press [OK].
Form Feed Timeout
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints the document. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Form Feed Timeout.
3Press [+] or [–] to set the Form Feed Timeout.
You can set the timeout delay in seconds.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4Press [OK].
Printer Printer
Portrait Landscape
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-60
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify an LF action.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of LF Action.
3Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].
4Press [OK].
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The
table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of CR Action.
3Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].
4Press [OK].
Job Name
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the Job Name.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Job Name.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
LF Only Only line feed performed.
LF and CR Line feed and character return performed.
Ignore LF No line feed performed.
Item Description
CR Only Only character return performed.
LF and CR Character return and line feed performed.
Ignore CR No character return performed.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-61
9
User Name
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the User Name.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of User Name.
3Select [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Paper Feed Mode
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. The
table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Paper Feed Mode.
3Press [Auto] or [Fixed].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-62
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also
be configured.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.
Print Report
Printable reports are as follows.
Status Page
Check the information including current settings, memory installed, and optional equipment installed.
Font List
Check the font samples installed in the machine.
Status Page
Firmware Version
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-63
9
Network Status
Check the information including firmware version, network address and protocol.
Service Status
More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status
pages for maintenance purpose.
Use the procedure below to print a report.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report] and [Next] of Print Report.
3Press [Print] for the report you want to print. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes]. Printing starts.
Send Result Report
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the
available settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/
Folder.
3Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Off No result report printed.
On Result report automatically printed.
Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.
Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more
destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with
the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.
Network Status Page
Firmware Version
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-64
Report for Job Canceled before Sending
Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of
Canceled before Sending.
3Press [Off], [On].
4Press [OK].
Sending Log History
You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Destination
Set the destination to which log histories are sent.
Use the procedure below to set the destination.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Destination.
3To enter a new e-mail address, press [E-mail Address Entry].
Press [E-mail Address], enter the destination e-mail address and then press [OK].
4To set an address from the address book, press [E-mail Address Book].
5Press [Address Book]. Select the destination from the address book and press [OK].
The selected e-mail addresses is displayed.
NOTE: For information on specifying destinations, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-40.
You can view information on the selected destinations by pressing [Detail].
6Press [OK].
Auto Sending
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs
has been logged.
Use the procedure below to set automatic log history transmission.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Auto Sending.
3Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the log history print by using [+]/[-] or the numeric keys. You can
enter any number between 1 and 1500.
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-65
9
Send Log History
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Use the procedure below to send the log history manually.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Start] of Send Log History.
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The log history is sent.
Job Log Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by e-mail.
Use the procedure below to set the subject.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Job Log Subject.
3Enter an e-mail subject not more than 60 characters.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4Check that the entry is correct and press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-66
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
• Density Adjustment …9-66
• Background Density Adj. …9-67
• Drum Refresh …9-67
• Correcting Black Lines …9-68
• System Initialization …9-68
• Display Brightness …9-69
• Silent Mode …9-69
• Auto Color Correction...9-69
• Color Registration...9-69
• Calibration Cycle...9-71
• Tone Curve Adjustment...9-72
• Calibration...9-72
• Developer Refresh...9-73
• Laser Scanner Cleaning...9-73
• First Print Position...9-73
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Density Adjustment
The density for all copying and the density for all sending and storing in document boxes can be made darker
or lighter.
Use the procedures below to adjust the density.
Copy
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Density Adjustment.
3Press [Next] of Copy.
4Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
5Press [OK].
Send/Box
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Density Adjustment.
3Press [Next] of Send/Box.
4Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
5Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-67
9
Background Density Adj.
Adjust the density used when the background of documents is automatically adjusted.
Use the procedure below to set the Background Density Adj..
Copy (Auto)
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Background Density Adj..
3Press [Change] of Copy (Auto).
4Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust background density.
5Press [OK].
Send/Box (Auto)
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Background Density Adj..
3Press [Change] of Send/Box (Auto).
4Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust background density.
5Press [OK].
Drum Refresh
Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies.
NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance].
3Press [Next] of Drum Refresh.
4Press [Start] to perform Drum Refresh.
5After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-68
Correcting Black Lines
Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when the optional
document processor is used.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Correcting Black Line.
3Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].
4Press [OK].
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults..
Refer to System Initialization on page 9-91 about the initialization procedures.
Item Description
Off No correction performed.
On(Low) Correction performed.
On(High) Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The reproduction of
fine lines on the original may becomes lighter than when using [On (Low)].
Paper feed
direction
(streaks caused
by contamination)
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-69
9
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Display Brightness.
3Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness.
4Press [OK].
Silent Mode
Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Silent Mode.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
NOTE: When this setting is turned ON, the First Print Time specification is not satisfied.
Auto Color Correction
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is
color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being
identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and
white.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Color Correction.
3Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set the detection level.
4Press [OK].
Color Registration
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this
function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.
Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected
through auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual
registration.
NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform calibration (see page 9-72). If color drift
remains, perform color registration.By performing color registration without performing calibration, the color drift
will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-70
Auto Correction
Follow the steps below to automatically correct color drift.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Color Registration.
3Press [Next] in Auto > [Start]. A chart is printed.
4As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the
platen with the edge with the arrows toward the back.
5Press [Start] to scan the chart.
6When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
7When color printing position correction ends, press [OK].
Manual Correction
To perform more detailed correction, follow the steps below.
1Display the Color Registration screen as explained in steps 1 and 2 of Auto Correction.
2Press [Next] in Manual.
3Press [Print] of Chart. A chart is printed.
On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 and V-1 to 5 are printed.
Chart Example
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-71
9
4Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match.
If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For
the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).
5Press [Next] of Registration.
6Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected.
7Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart and press
[OK].
Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-].
By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse
direction, press [+].
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
8Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart.
9Press [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.
Calibration Cycle
After Auto Clear has been activated, or during printing or while processing Color Registration, Calibration...
Remaining: xx seconds may be displayed. While this message is displayed, the machine makes adjustments to
maintain image quality. Wait until the message disappears.
NOTE: If [Custom] appears in the setting items, the setting cannot be changed.
Set the calibration cycle here. The setting items are as follows.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Calibration Cycle.
3Select [Auto], [Short], [Standard] or [Long].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Auto Automatically sets the cycle for calibration.
Short Sets a short calibration cycle and increases the number of times
performed, with priority to image quality.
Standard Sets a standard calibration cycle, compromising between image
quality and downtime for processing.
Long Sets a long calibration cycle and decreases the number of times
performed, to ensure minimal downtime.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-72
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy
does not match the original. Perform calibration before using tone curve adjustment. Use tone curve adjustment
when the color is not enhanced even after performing calibration (see page 9-72).
NOTE: To perform tone curve adjustment, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
A total of 3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially
during the adjustment.
Use the procedure below for normal adjustment.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Tone Curve Adjustment.
3Press [Start]. A pattern is printed.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.
4As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the
platen with the edge with the arrows toward the back.
5Press [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.
The second pattern is output.
6Check that the number "2" (to "3") is printed at the bottom of the
pattern and repeat steps 4 to 6 twice to read patterns 2 and 3 in
sequence.
7Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
Calibration
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting
hue and color drift in detail. Use tone curve adjustment (see page 9-72) when the color is not enhanced even
after performing calibration. If the hue and color are not enhanced, use color registration (see page 9-69).
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Calibration.
3Press [Start]. Calibration begins.
4Press [OK] after Calibration is complete.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-73
9
Developer Refresh
When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Developer Refresh.
3Press [Start]. Developer Refresh begins.
NOTE: Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
4Press [OK] after Developer Refresh is complete.
Laser Scanner Cleaning
If white or color streaks appear on images, perform Laser Scanner Cleaning.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Laser Scanner Cleaning.
3Press [Start]. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.
4Press [OK] after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete.
First Print Position
Using this function speeds up either of the first print time of black and white printing or color printing by changing
the default start position of the first print. In addition, the machine can automatically detect the appropriate
position depending on your usage.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of First Print Position.
3Select [Standard], [Black & White Priority], [Color Priority] or [Auto].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Standard Default of the first print time.
Black & White Priority Speed up the first print time of black and white printing.
Color Priority Speed up the first print time of color printing.
Auto Automatically detects the appropriate position depending on your usage.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-74
Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:
• Date/Time …9-74
• Date Format …9-74
• Time Zone …9-75
• Auto Panel Reset …9-75
• Low Power Timer …9-76
• Auto Sleep …9-76
• Error Clear Timer …9-77
• Interrupt Clear Timer …9-78
• Error Job Skip …9-78
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and
time set here will be displayed on the header.
NOTE: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.
Use the procedure below to set the date and time.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time.
3Press [+] or [–] to enter the date and time respectively.
4Press [OK].
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 9-109) is running, the If you change
Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/
time, press [Yes].
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Use the procedure below to select the date format.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format.
3Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/MM/DD] and press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-75
9
Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.
Use the procedure below to set the time difference.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone.
3Select the location.
NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to select the location.
4Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
NOTE:
If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.
Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 9-16 for the default settings.
Auto Panel Reset
Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-76
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Panel Reset Timer.
3Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4Press [OK].
Low Power Timer
You can specify the amount of time to wait before Auto Low Power Mode.
Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments).
For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.
Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Low Power Timer].
3Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on.
4Press [OK].
Auto Sleep
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on
page 2-10 for Sleep.
Auto Sleep
Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.
NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Sleep.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-77
9
Sleep Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer.
3Press [+] and [–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on.
4Press [OK].
Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. For details, refer to
Responding when Error Messages, on page 12-8.
Auto Error Clear
Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4Press [OK].
Error Clear Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options
are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Error Clear Timer.
3Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until printing restarts.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-78
Interrupt Clear Timer
Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode
and then left unused. Any period between 5 and 495 seconds (in five-second increments) can be set.
The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Interrupt Clear Timer.
3Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer.
4Press [OK].
Error Job Skip
Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multi Purpose tray" error occurred when
the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period of time elapses. The period of time can be set
within the range 5 to 90 seconds (increments of 5 seconds).
NOTE: When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.
The procedure for setting the Error Job Skip is explained below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Error Job Skip.
3Press [Off] or [On].
4If you selected [On], set the time until the job is skipped with [+] or [-].
5Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-79
9
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be
changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When
adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in
with administrator privileges.
Contact
A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, SMB folder path, and FAX No. (optional).
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination], [Add/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Contact] and then [Next].
3To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
4Press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter “0000”.
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers
for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Save] and
the number cannot be registered. If you set “0000” as the address number, the address is registered under the
lowest available number.
5Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.
6Press [Change] of Name.
7Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK]. The
screen shown in step 3 reappears.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
8Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an FTP
folder.
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-80
E-mail Address
Press [Change] of E-mail Address, enter the E-mail address and press [OK].The table below explains the
items to be entered.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
The Folder (FTP) Address
Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
* If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" format.
(e.g., FTPhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
Item Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name* FTP server host name or IP address 64
Path Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "User\ScanData")
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
128
Login User Name User name FTP server login 64
Login Password Password for FTP server login 64
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-81
9
The Folder (SMB) Address
Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
To search for and register a folder on a PC on the network, press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network].
If you pressed [Search SMB Host], enter the "Domain/Workgroup" and "Host Name" to search the PCs on
the network.
If you pressed [Windows Network], all PCs on the network are searched. A maximum of 500 addresses can
be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears, and
press [Next]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. After you enter the login user
name and login password name, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and
press [Next]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
9Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Save]. The destination is added to the Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, press [Yes] in the pop-up screen that appears after [Save]
is pressed.
NOTE: To register a new One Touch Key, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch
Key) on page 9-83.
Item Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*
* If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the “Host name: port number” format.
(e.g., SMBhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Host name or IP address of the sending computer 64
Path Path to the folder used to save files (e.g., “User\ScanData”) 128
Login User Name User name for folder access
For example, abcdnet\james.smith
64
Login Password Password for folder access 64
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-82
Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When
adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added
first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and a total of 10 destinations for the
FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
Use the procedure below to register a group.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination], [Add/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Group] and then [Next].
3To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
4Use [+]/[-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers for
contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Save] and
the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address number, the address is registered under the
lowest available number.
5Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears.
6Press [Change] of Name.
7Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
8Press [Member].
9Press [Add].
10
Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
11 Press [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 9 to 11.
12
Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Save]. Now the group is added to the
Address Book.
To register the registered address in a one-touch key, press [Yes] in the pop-up screen that appears after [Save]
is pressed.
NOTE: To register a new One Touch Key, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch
Key) on page 9-83.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-83
9
Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (Contacts) you added to the Address Book.
Use the procedure below to edit a destination.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination] and then [Add/Edit] of Address Book.
3Select a destination or group to edit.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
4Press [Detail].
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Editing a Contact
1Change Address Number, Name and destination type and address. Refer to Contact on page 9-79 for
the details.
2After you have completed the changes, press [Save].
3Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.
Editing a Group
1Change Address Number and Name. Refer to Group on page 9-82 for the details.
2Press [Member].
3To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the
screen to confirm the deletion.
4After you have completed the changes, press [Save].
5Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.
Deleting a Contact or Group
Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. Deletion is performed.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key)
Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 1,000 destinations can be registered.
NOTE: Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-40 for use of One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination] and [Add/Edit] of One Touch Key.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-84
3Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
4Press [Add/Edit]. The address book appears.
5Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number.
Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
6Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
Editing One Touch Key
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination] and then [Add/Edit] of One Touch Key.
3Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Changing the Registered Information
1Press [Add/Edit].
2Select a new destination (Contact or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the
selected destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
3Press [OK].
4Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Registered Information
1Press [Delete].
2Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-85
9
Sort
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Sort.
3Select [No.] or [Name].
4Press [OK].
Narrow Down
This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is
displayed.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Narrow Down.
3Select the type of destination filter.
4Press [OK].
Item Detail
No. Displays the destination list in order of the registered number.
Name Displays the destination list in order of the registered name.
Item Detail
Off Displays all destination types in the destination list.
E-mail Displays only e-mail destinations.
Folder Displays only folder (SMB or FTP) destinations.
FAX Displays only FAX destinations.
i-FAX Displays only i-FAX destinations.
Group Displays only groups.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-86
Internet
This procedure sets up the Internet browser application. You can specify the following Internet browser settings.
• Internet Browser Setting
• Browser Preferences
• Proxy Settings
Internet Browser Setting
This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used.
Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [Change] of Internet Browser.
4Press [On] or [Off].
5Press [OK].
Browser Preferences
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed.
NOTE: This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting (page 9-86).
Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [Next] of Browser Environment.
4To set your home page, press [Change] of Home Page, press [URL], enter the URL and then press [OK].
Press [OK] again.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-87
9
5To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size, select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size and
then press [OK].
6To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display Mode, select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or [Smart-
Fit Rendering] as the display mode and then press [OK].
7To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press [Change] of Cookie, select [Accept All], [Reject All] or
[Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie acceptance policy and then press [OK].
Proxy Settings
Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].
To set whether or not the same proxy server is used for all protocols
1If the same proxy server will not be used, remove the checkmark from [Use the Same Proxy Server for
All Protocols].
To set a proxy server (HTTP)
1Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
To set a proxy server (HTTPS)
1Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
To set domains for which no proxy is used
1Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains, enter the domain name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-88
Application
You can install and use applications that will make your day-to-day use of this machine more efficient.
Installing Applications
You can install new applications.
Use the procedure below to install an application.
1Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB Port (A1).
NOTE: If Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. appears, press [No].
2Press the System Menu key.
3Press [ ] and then [Application].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
4Press [Add].
5Select the application to be installed and press [Install].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
6When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take
some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
7To install another application, repeat steps 5 to 6.
8To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Memory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely
removed message appears. Then remove the USB memory.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-89
9
Activating/Deactivating Application
To use an application, set the application to Activate.
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ] and then [Application].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Select the desired application and press [Activate].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
NOTE: To exit an application, press [Deactivate].
4Enter the license key and press [Official].
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
5When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
CAUTION: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Launching Applications
You can launch any application for which Activate is set.
Use the procedure below to launch an application.
1Press the Application key.
A list of available applications appears on the touch panel.
2Press the key for the application to be launched.
The application starts up.
3To exit the application, press [✕].
4When the application exit confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
CAUTION: The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-90
Deleting Applications
Use the procedure below to delete an installed application.
CAUTION: Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application. (Refer to Activating/
Deactivating Application on page 9-89.)
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ] and then [Application].
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Select the application to be deleted and press [Delete].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
4When the deletion confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The application is deleted.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-91
9
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk installed on the machine to return to the default mode.
CAUTION: System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes, data stored in the Document Box,
addresses in the Address Book, user property, account information, and settings.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Refer to the Data Security
Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled DVD about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed
and related procedures.
Using KMnet Viewer allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Start] of System Initialization.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
Initialization starts.
IMPORTANT: The Formatting... Do not turn off the main power switch. message appears during initialization.
Wait until initialization ends.
4Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the main power switch off and on.
appears. Turn the main power switch off.
Restart Entire Device
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the
machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
Use the procedure below to restart the system.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System] and [Start] of Restart Entire Device.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password, and press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The system is restarted.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-92
Network
The following network settings are available.
• Host Name …9-92
•TCP/IP …9-92
• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …9-93
• TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …9-94
• Protocol Detail …9-96
•NetWare …9-97
• AppleTalk …9-97
• WSD Scan …9-98
• WSD Print …9-98
• Enhanced WSD …9-98
• Enhanced WSD (SSL) …9-99
• Secure Protocol …9-99
• IPSec …9-102
• LAN Interface …9-103
• Restart Network …9-103
Host Name
Check the host name of the machine. Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network. Check the host name displayed under Host Name.
TCP/IP
Select whether or not to use TCP/IP. The default setting is Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-93
9
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".
This section explains the Bonjour Settings procedures. For other TCP/IP (IPv4) settings, refer to the TCP/IP
(IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-13.
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] and then press [OK].
5Press [Change] of IPv4.
6Press [DHCP].
7Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
8Press [Bonjour].
9Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the numeric keys.
11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using the numeric keys.
12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address using the numeric keys.
13 Check if all the address entries are correct and press [OK].
Bonjour Settings
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] and then press [OK].
5Press [Change] of IPv4.
6Press [Bonjour].
7Press [On] or [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-94
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, TCP/IP (IPv6):
Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4Press [On] and then press [OK].
5Press [Next] of IPv6.
6Press [Change] of IPv6.
7Press [On]. Press [On]. IP Address (Link Local) appears.
8Press [OK].
Manual Setting (IPv6)
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The manual setting is
available when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6).
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Next] of IPv6.
4Press [Next] of Manual Setting.
5Press [IP Address (Manual)] to enter IP address. The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers
(128 bit in total) separated by colons, e.g. 2001:db8:3c4d:15::1a2c:1a1f.
6Press [OK].
Press [# Keys] of Prefix Length (0 - 128) to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys.
7Press [Default Gateway] to enter the default gateway.
8Check that all the entries are correct and Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-95
9
RA (Stateless) Settings
Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when selecting [On] for
TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Next] of IPv6.
4Press [Change] of RA(Stateless).
5Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless). When selecting [On], IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless) appears.
6Press [OK].
DHCP (IPv6) Settings
Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available when selecting
[On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
3Press [Next] of IPv6.
4Press [Change] of DHCP.
5Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP. When selecting [On], IP Address (Stateful) appears.
6Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-96
Protocol Detail
The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are available when
TCP/IP is On.
Item Description Default
Setting
Restarting
the System*
*Y: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
N: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using
NetBEUI.
On Y
LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as
the network protocol.
On Y
SMTP
(E-mail TX)
Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP. Off N
POP3
(E-mail RX)
Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3. Off N
FTP Client
(Transmission)
Select whether or not to send documents using FTP.
When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number. Use the
FTP default port 21.
On
Port:21
N
FTP Server
(Reception)
Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP. On Y
SMB Client
(Transmission)
Select whether or not to send documents using SMB.
When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port Number.
Use the SMB default port 139. For Windows Vista, use 445.
On
Port:139
N
i-FAX Select whether or not to use i-FAX. On N
LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP. Off N
SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP. On Y
SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3. Off Y
HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP. On Y
HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS.
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page 9-99.
On Y
IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP. When
selecting [On], set the IPP default Port Number. Use the
IPP default port 631.
Off
Port:631
Y
IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page 9-99.
Off Y
Raw Port
Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port.
On Y
ThinPrint
(UG-31)
Select whether or not to communicate using ThinPrint. If set
to [On], you can set the port number that ThinPrint uses.
Normally 4,000 is used. SSL settings can also be selected.
On Y
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-97
9
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP (E-mail TX) settings.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System] ,[Next] of Network, [Next] of TCP/IP Setting and then [Next] of Protocol Detail to display the
network settings screen.
3Display the item you want to set and press [Change] for that item.
In this example, press [Change] of SMTP (E-mail TX).
4Press [On] or [Off].
5Press [OK].
NetWare
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,
Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings are "On, Frame Type: Auto".
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare.
3Press [On].
4Press the key for the frame type you want to use.
5Press [OK].
AppleTalk
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of AppleTalk.
3Press [On] or [Off].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-98
WSD Scan
Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Scan.
3Press [On] or [Off].
4Press [OK].
WSD Print
Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Print.
3Press [On] or [Off].
4Press [OK].
Enhanced WSD
Set whether to use our proprietary web services. The WIA driver, TWAIN driver, and Network driver use this
Enhanced WSD Web service. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of Enhanced WSD.
3Press [On] or [Off].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-99
9
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL. SSL must be set to "On" in SSL on page 9-99. The
default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of Enhanced WSD (SSL).
3Press [On] or [Off].
4Press [OK].
Secure Protocol
Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
The following Secure Protocol settings are available.
• SSL …9-99
• IPP Security …9-100
• HTTP Security …9-100
• LDAP Security …9-101
• SMTP Security …9-101
• POP3 Security (User 1) …9-102
• POP3 Security (User 2) …9-102
• POP3 Security (User 3) …9-102
SSL
Select whether or not to use SSL. The default setting is On.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Next] of SSL.
3Press [On] or [Off].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-100
IPP Security
Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting is IPP or IPP over SSL.
NOTE: IPP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-96.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of IPP Security.
3Press [IPP over SSL Only] or [IPP or IPP over SSL].
4Press [OK].
HTTP Security
Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting is HTTP or HTTPS.
NOTE: HTTP or HTTPS must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-96.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of HTTP Security.
3Press [HTTP or HTTPS] or [HTTPS Only].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-101
9
LDAP Security
Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. This setup is
available when SSL is On. The default setting is Off.
NOTE: LDAP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-96.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of LDAP Security.
3Press [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
4Press [OK].
SMTP Security
Set the protocol that can be used on the SMTP port. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting
is Off.
NOTE: SMTP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 9-96.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of SMTP Security.
3Press [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
4Press [OK].
Item Description
Off Do not use security employed by the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS Use implicit mode for data communication. The server provides services
using the SSL/TLS port (636). Encryption is applied to any data
communication using this port.
STARTTLS Use explicit mode for data communication. Select this if the server supports
the start TLS command. This uses the same port (389) as LDAP.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-102
POP3 Security (User 1)
Set the protocol that can be used on the POP3 port. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting
is Off.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of POP3 Security (User 1).
3Press [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
4Press [OK].
POP3 Security (User 2)
Set the protocol that can be used on the POP3 port. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting
is Off.
For the procedure for selecting the POP3 Security (User 2) Setting, see POP3 Security (User 1).
POP3 Security (User 3)
Set the protocol that can be used on the POP3 port. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting
is Off.
For the procedure for selecting the POP3 Security (User 3) Setting, see POP3 Security (User 1).
IPSec
Sets up IPSec. The default setting is Off.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network, and then [Change] of IPSec.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [On].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-103
9
LAN Interface
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.
IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network from the system menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON. For detailed information on restarting the network, refer to Restart Network on page 9-103.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of LAN Interface.
3Select [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half], [100BASE-TX Full] or [1000BASE-
T] as the LAN interface.
4Press [OK].
Restart Network
To restart the network card of the device, follow the steps below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Start] of Restart Network.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-104
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or
optional interfaces.
The following interface block settings are available:
• USB Host
• USB Device
• Optional interface
USB Host
This locks and protects the USB Port (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Host.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [Block].
4Press [OK].
USB Device
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Device.
3Press [Block].
4Press [OK].
Optional interface
This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of Optional Interface 1 or Optional
Interface 2.
3Press [Block].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-105
9
Security Level
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is
no need for customers to use this menu.
Document Guard
When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and/
or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information.
Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in KX DRIVER to embed the guard pattern in a document. (Refer to
the Printer Driver User Guide for details.)
We suggest you confirm how the machine performs this function in your environment.
Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern
Item Description
Common operation Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document
guard pattern and stops scanning the remaining documents.
Copy functions Prints the documents in blank when the machine detected the document
guard pattern.
Send functions Cancels the job.*
* Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have
selected File Separation. If not, every Document will not to be sent.
Document Box functions Does not store the documents in the hard disk
FAX functions Does not send the documents.
Print the guard
pattern using KX
DRIVER.
copy
Canceled.
send
or fax
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-106
Limitations:
- Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image. (Printing speed will not
be limited.)
- FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission.
Note:
- The Printed Document Guard Kit can not fully prevent a leak of information. We do not guarantee
any loss incurred while using this feature or if a malfunction occurs with this feature.
- The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that is decorated with special design
may not be detected.
- We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection. If a malfunction occurs, contact your service
representative.
Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System] and then [Change] of Document Guard.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Press [On].
4Press [OK].
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-107
9
Data Security
Settings related to data stored in the machine's hard disk and memory can be configured.
Data Sanitization
All address information registered in the machine and image data saved in the machine will be erased.
NOTE: About 8 hours are required to complete this processing, depending on the amount of data. Once
started, the processing cannot be canceled.
Before performing this task, disconnect the modular cable, network cable, and any other cables.
Do not turn off the main power during sanitization. If the main power is turned off, sanitization will automatically
resume when the power is turned on, but complete sanitization cannot be guaranteed.
The data erased by initialization is shown below.
Category Data erased
Devices/jobs • Job settings set by user
• Network settings
• Image data saved in document boxes, etc.
• Data registered in one-touch keys
• Job logs
• User information
(user lists, address books, document boxes registered by user, etc.)
• Account information for account tracking
• Network certificates
• Startup screen of machine changed by service technician
Fax*
* Only when the optional fax kit is installed
• Fax settings set by user
• Transmission restriction settings
• Encryption key settings
• Communication logs
• Reserved jobs
• Settings for condition-based reception/forwarding
Applications/programs • Applications/programs registered by the user or service technician
• Sample programs
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-108
The procedure is as follows.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System], [Next] of Data Security and then [Next] of Data Sanitization.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen is displayed, enter your login user name and password, and press
[Login]. You must log in with administrator authority. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for
the default login user name and password.
3Press [Start].
Initialization starts. When initialization is completed, the sanitization results will appear on the screen.
Hard Disk Initialization
When the optional Data Security kit is installed, [Hard Disk Initialization] is added to the Data Security settings.
For details, refer to the Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled DVD.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-109
9
Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Application
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis.
• Printed Document Guard Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on
the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the
pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, or prohibiting transmission.
NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application.
Starting Application Use
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Select the desired application and press [Activate].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
4In the license key entry screen, press [Official].
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
5When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Default Setting (System Menu)
9-110
Checking Application Details
Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
NOTE: If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on
page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
3Select the application you want to check the details of and press [Detail].
You can now view detailed information on the selected application.
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display)
Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged. Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed
to the next screen.
NOTE: Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen.
To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens, you must return to the original display.
Press the Accessibility Display key again.
Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy
or Send (i.e. the Copy or Send key indicator is On).
Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel.
Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric
key corresponding to the number displayed. (e.g. Press
the 2 key to adjust zoom.)
Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent
operations.
Status
Copies
10/10/2010 10:10
10-1
10 Management
This chapter explains the following operations.
• User Login Setting ............................................................................10-2
• Job Accounting Setting ...................................................................10-20
Management
10-2
User Login Setting
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login
user name and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified
only by the machine administrator.
Users that are not able to log in to the machine can be allowed to use the functions of the machine on a restricted
basis. The users can use the machine without performing authentication, and thus this feature is convenient
when the majority of users are managed with the same authority. This can also be used to reduce operating
costs, for example by prohibiting color copy in "Guest Authorization Set." so that only users who log in can use
color copying.
If To use this function, press Authentication key and login appears while operating the machine, you must press
the Authentication/Logout key and log in as a user for whom the function is not prohibited.
First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 10-2)
Add a user.(page 10-5)
Log out.(page 10-4)
The registered user logs in for operations.(page 10-3)
User Login
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then
[Change] of User Login.
Item Description
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local
user list stored in the machine.
Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a
user property stored in an Authentication Server to access the
network authentication login page.
Management
10-3
10
5Select [Local Authentication] or [Network
Authentication]. Select [Off] to disable user login
administration.
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the
host name (62 characters or less) and domain
name (256 characters or less) for the
Authentication Server. Select [NTLM], [Kerberos]
or [Ext.] as the server type.
If you selected [Ext.] for the server type, enter the
port number.
NOTE: If the login user name and password are
rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the
Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the
machine, login with any administrator registered in the
local user list and correct the settings.
Up to 10 domains can be registered for network
authentication.
6Press [OK].
Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time
you use this machine.
NOTE: If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the authentication/logout key must be pressed when
logging in.
Login
Use the procedure below to login.
1When the machine is operated and the next screen
appears, select the authentication destination from
the "Login to:" pull-down menu and press [Login
User Name].
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
2Enter the login user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
Authentication is possible without selecting an
authentication destination by entering "Login User
Name@domain name" in "Login User Name".
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login
Off
OKCancel
Server Type
Kerberos
User login administration.
Select authentication method.
Local
Authentication
Network
Authentication
Expansion
Authentication
Add/Edit
Status
NTLM
Ext.
Domain
Default Domain
Host Name
Host
10/10/2010 10:10
Login
User Name
Login
Status
Enter login user name and password.
Login
Password
abcdef
********
Login to: Local
# Keys
ID Card
Login
CancelCheck Counter
# Keys
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-4
3Press [Login Password].
Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the
numeric keys.
4Enter the login password and press [OK].
NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, you can browse
the number of pages printed and the number of pages
scanned by pressing [Check Counter].
If Network Authentication is selected as the user
authentication method, either Local or Network can be
selected as the authentication destination.
5Check the login user name and password are
correct, and press [Login].
Logout
To log out the machine, press the Authentication/
Logout key to return to the login user name/login
password entry screen.
Auto Logout
Logout is automatically executed in the following
cases:
• When the Power key is pressed to enter the
sleep mode
• When auto sleep is activated
• When auto panel reset is activated
• When auto low power mode is activated
• When low power mode is activated by pressing
the Energy Saver key.
Management
10-5
10
Adding a User (Local User List)
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name).
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item Description
User Name*
* Mandatory at user registration.
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name* Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The
same login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters).
Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who
registered his/her account name, can login without entering the
account ID. Refer to Job Accounting Setting on page 10-20.
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered
address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations
that need any E-mail function.
Local Authorization Set usage authority for each user. Local Authorization must be
enabled. (Refer to page 10-9.)
Use of the following items can be restricted.
Print Restriction: Select whether or not use of the print function
of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the print
function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction: Select whether or not use of the copy print
function is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the
copy print function (color) is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Full Color): Select whether or not use of the
copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Send Restriction: Select whether or not use of the send function
is prohibited.
Fax TX Restriction: Select whether or not use of the fax send
function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box: Select whether or not use of the box
store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory: Select whether or not use of the
external memory store function is prohibited.
Management
10-6
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is
already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 35/35 ppm model : 3500, 45/45 ppm model : 4500,
55/50 ppm model : 5500
Login Password: 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 35/35 ppm model : 3500, 45/45 ppm model : 4500,
55/50 ppm model : 5500
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name: Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
Use the procedure below to register a new user.
1Login as a user with administrator rights.
2Press the System Menu key.
3Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
4If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
5Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Add/Edit] of
Local User List, and then [Add].
6Press [Change] of User Name.
7Enter the user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
8Enter the login user name and E-mail address
following 6 and 7 above.
9Press [Change] of Login Password and then
[Password].
User:
User Name:
Account Name:
Access Level:
Save
E-mail Address:
Login Password:Login User Name:
Cancel
02User
abcd@efg.com
**********
0099
Change
Status
Change
Change
Change Change
Change
Change
ID Card Information:
Empty
01 User
Account
Local Authorization: Next
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-7
10
10
Enter the login password and press [OK].
11
Press [Confirm Password].
12 Enter the same login password to confirm and
press [OK].
13
Press [OK].
14
Press [Change] of Access Level.
15
Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
16
Press [Change] of Account Name.
17
Select the account and press [OK].
NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down
menu to sort the account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
18
Press [Next] of Local Authorization.
19
Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
20
Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
21
Repeat steps 19 and 20 to set Print Restriction
(Color), Copy Restriction, Copy Restriction (Color),
Copy Restriction (Full Color), Send Restriction, Fax
TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in Box, and Storing
Restr. in Memory.
22
Press [Close].
23
Press [Save] to add a new user on the local user
list.
NOTE: If simple login is enabled, a confirmation
screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To
configure simple login settings, press [Yes]. For the
procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to
Simple Login Settings on page 10-17. If you select
[No], you will return to the user list screen.
User: - Account Name
1/2
Select account to which this user will be attached.
OKCancel
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
Account Name Account ID
Detail
Name
Sort
00002000
00005000
00003000
00004000
Status
02
03
04
05
Account
Account
Account
Account
01 Account 00001000
Other Account
10/10/2010 10:10
User: - Local Authorization
Print Restriction:
Send Restriction:
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Close
FAX TX Restriction:
Copy Restriction (Color):Copy Restriction:
Change Print Restriction (Color):
Status
Change
Change
Change
Storing Restr. in Box:
10/10/2010 10:10
Change
Change
Storing Restr. in Memory: Change
Change
Change
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Management
10-8
Changing User Properties
User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending
on user access privilege.
NOTE: To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine
administrator authority. You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user. Refer to Adding a
User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name and password.
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be
changed.
Use the procedure below to change the user properties.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Add/Edit] of
Local User List.
5Select the user whose properties you wish to
change.
NOTE: Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the Sort
pull-down menu to sort the user list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by
name or login user name.
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Changing user information
1Press [Detail].
2Refer to steps 6 to 19 of Adding a User (Local
User List) to change a user property.
3Press [Save].
4Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation
screen. The user information is changed.
User:
User Name:
Account Name:
Access Level:
Save
E-mail Address:
Login Password:Login User Name:
Cancel
02User
abcd@efg.com
**********
0099
Change
Status
Change
Change
Change Change
Change
Change
ID Card Information:
Empty
01 User
Account
Local Authorization: Next
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-9
10
Deleting a user
1Press [Delete].
2Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion.
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE: The default user with administrator rights
cannot be deleted.
For a user without administrator rights who logs in (User Property)
These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and E-mail
address.
Although login user name, access level, or account name cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.
Use the procedure below to change user properties.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Property].
3Refer to steps 6 to 19 of Adding a User (Local User
List) to change user properties.
Press [Detail] of Login User Name or Account
Name to check the present status.
4Press [Save] to finalize changed user properties.
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Change] of
Local Authorization.
5Select [Off] or [On].
6Press [OK].
User:
User Name:
Account Name:
Access Level:
Save
E-mail Address:
Login Password:Login User Name:
Cancel
02User
abcd@efg.com
**********
0099
Change
Status
Detail
Change
Detail
Change
ID Card Information:
Empty
01 User
Account
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-10
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent
IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account
ID is unknown.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Change] of Unknown ID Job.
5Press [Reject] or [Permit].
6Press [OK].
Group Authorization Set.
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE: To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in User Login on page 10-2. Select [On] for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9-96.
Group Authorization
Use the group authorization.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Group
Authorization.
5Press [On].
6Press [OK].
Item Description
Reject The job is rejected (not printed).
Permit The job is permitted to be printed.
Management
10-11
10
Group List
Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Up to 20 groups can be individually registered. Other
users and groups belong to Others.
The table below explains the group information to be registered.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
Authorization Set., [Add/Edit] of Group List, and
then [Add].
Item Description
Group ID*
* For Group ID, specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows.
If you are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using
Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation DVD for
Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).
Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges.
Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Print Restriction (Color)
Select whether or not to reject usage of the color print functions for the printer.
Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Copy Restriction (Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of the color copy functions.
Copy Restr. (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of only the full color copy functions.
Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX TX Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restr. in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing Restr. in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
User Login/Job Accounting - Group List
Add or edit the groups. (Maximum: 20)
Group ID Group Name
Detail Delete
Add
Save
Status
Cancel
Others
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-12
5Press [Change] of Group ID.
6Enter the group ID and press [OK].
7Press [Change] of Group Name.
8Enter the group name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
9Press [Change] of Access Level.
10 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
11 Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
12 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Print
Restriction (Color), Copy Restriction, Copy
Restriction (Color), Copy Restr. (Full Color), Send
Restriction, FAX TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in
Box, and Storing Restr. in Memory.
14 Press [Save] to add a new group on the group list.
Guest Authorization Set.
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine
are allowed to use.
NOTE: To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in User Login on page
10-2.
Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.
Guest Authorization
Set guest approval.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Guest
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Guest
Authorization.
Group:
Group ID:
Copy Restriction:
Access Level:
Save
Copy Restriction (Color):
Print Restriction:
Print Restriction (Color):
Cancel
Change Group Name:
Status
Change
Change
Change
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Change
Change Change
Change
Send Restriction: Change
1/2
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-13
10
5Select [On] or [Off].
6Press [OK].
NOTE: If the guest authentication setting is enabled, the authentication/logout key must be pressed when
logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use a different
function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the guest properties.
Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
The table below explains the guest property to be registered.
User Login/Job Accounting - Guest Authorization
Use the guest authorization.
Status
Cancel OK
Off On
10/10/2010 10:10
Item Description
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.
Authorization Rules Set usage authority for each user.
Use of the following items can be restricted.
Print Restriction: Select whether or not use of the print function
of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the print
function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction: Select whether or not use of the copy print
function is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Color): Select whether or not use of the copy
print function (color) is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Full Color): Select whether or not use of the
copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Send Restriction: Select whether or not use of the send function
is prohibited.
Fax TX Restriction: Select whether or not use of the fax send
function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box: Select whether or not use of the box store
function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Memory: Select whether or not use of the
external memory store function is prohibited.
Management
10-14
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Guest
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Guest
Property.
5Press [Change] of User Name.
6Enter the user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7
Press [Change] of Account Name.
8
Select the account and press [OK].
NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down
menu to sort the account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
9
Press [Next] of Authorization Rules.
10 Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
11 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
12
Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Print Restriction
(Color), Copy Restriction, Copy Restriction (Color),
Copy Restriction (Full Color), Send Restriction, Fax
TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in Box, and Storing
Restr. in Memory.
13
Press [Close].
14
Press [Save].
User Login/Job Accounting - Guest Property
User Name:
Authorization Rules:
Close
Account Name:Access Level:
Change
Status
Change
Next
Guest
02Account
User
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-15
10
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server.The user name and
e-mail address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and
the header of e-mail.
NOTE: To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected
for the authentication method in User Login on page 10-2. Select [On] for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9-
96.
The table below explains the required information to be registered.
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the
network authentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1.
*3 Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2, and if the
value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows,
the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales.
*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
Item Description
Server Name*1Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server
name is not entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for
Network Authentication.
Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.
Name 1*2Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
E-mail Address*4Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address from the LDAP server (up
to 32 characters).
Authenticat Type*5Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the
setting, restart the system or turn the power off and then on.
Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255
seconds).
LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the
LDAP server. The default setting is OFF.
Management
10-16
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Change] of
Obtain NW User Property.
5Press [On].
6Press [Server Name].
7Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and
press [OK].
8Press [# keys] to enter the LDAP port number using
the numeric keys.
9Press [Name 1].
10
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to
be displayed and press [OK].
11
Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set [Name 2].
12
Press [E-mail Address].
13
Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail
address and press [OK].
14
If you set the server type to [Kerberos], press
[Authentication Type] and set the authentication
method.
15
Press [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to
wait before time-out.
16
Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time
and press [OK].
17
Press [LDAP Security] to select the type of
encryption according to the type of security
employed by the LDAP server.
18
Select [Off], [SSL/TLS], or [STARTTLS] and press
[OK].
User Login/Job Accounting - Obtain NW User Property
Get the network user information.
On
Off
Cancel OK
Server Name
Search
Timeout
LDAP
Security
LDAP Server Information:
E-mail
Address
Port:
Name 2
Name 1
Acquisition of User Information:
Status
# Keys
displayName
mail
192.181.11.11
389
30
Off
sec.
Authenticat
Type
Simple
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-17
10
Simple Login Settings
Simple login makes it possible to log in by simply selecting a user. The user must be previously registered.
NOTE: For user registration, refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5.
To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in User Login on page 10-2.
If the guest authentication setting is enabled, Simple login cannot be enabled.
Simple Login
Select whether or not simple login is enabled.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Simple
Login Settings, and then [Change] of Simple Login.
5Select [On] or [Off].
6Press [OK].
Simple Login Key
Register a user for simple login. You can add Up to 20 users.
Use the procedure below.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your
login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges. Refer to Adding a User (Local User
List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name
and password.
User Login/Job Accounting - Simple Login
Use the Simple Login.
Status
Cancel OK
Off On
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-18
4Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Simple
Login Settings, and then [Next] of Simple Login
Key.
5Press [Add/Edit].
6Press [Change] in Display Name, enter the user
name to be displayed, and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7Press [Change] of User.
8To specify the user from local users, select [Local
User]. To specify from network users, select
[Network User]. Press [Next].
The next step varies depending on which
specification method you selected.
Specifying the user from local users
9Select the user to be set for simple login.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by
destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-40 for Address List.
Status
Add or edit the Simple Login key.
01 No.
Detail
A
02
B
03
C
Close
Delete
Add/Edit
User Login/Job Accounting - Simple Login Key
1/2
10/10/2010 10:10
Simple Login Key:
Display Name:
Save
Icon:Password Login:
Change User:
Status
Change
Detail
Change
Cancel Back
**********
Guest Guest
10/10/2010 10:10
Simple Login Key: - User
Assing the user to the Simple Login key.
Select the user type.
Status
Cancel Next
Local User Network User
10/10/2010 10:10
Status
User Name
Detail
A
Sort Name
OK
Search(Name)
Simple Login Key: - User
Select the user.
Search(Login)
Cancel Back
Login User Name
B
C
A
B
C 1/1
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-19
10
Specifying the user from network users
9Press [Login User Name] and [Login
Password], enter the information of the user
to be registered, and press [OK]. If you are
specifying a user for whom a domain is set
in network authentication, press the Domain
pull-down menu and select the domain
where the user is registered.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
10
Press [Change] of Password Login.
11
Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
12
Press [Change] of Icon.
13
Select the user icon to be displayed and press
[OK].
14
Press [Save].
Status
User Name
Domain:
OK
# Keys
Simple Login Key: - User
Enter login user name and password.
Cancel Back
Login
User Name
Login
Password
# Keys
domain 1
**********
0099
10/10/2010 10:10
Cancel OK
Male 1
Simple Login Key: - Icon
Set the icon to use for the Simple Login key.
Status
Male 2 Female 1 Female 2
Soccer Tennis Basketball Piano
Guitar Trumpet Car Bicycle
Train Dog Cat Parakeet
Sunflower Tulips Earth Moon
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-20
Job Accounting Setting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
• Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts.
• Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
• Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
• Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
• Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
• Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.
Enable job accounting. (page 10-20)
Add an account. (page 10-22)
Log out. (page 10-21)
Other users login for operations. (page 10-21)
Job Accounting
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, and then
[Change] of Job Accounting.
5Press [On]. To disable job accounting, press [Off].
6Press [OK].
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu
default screen, logout is automatically executed and
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
Management
10-21
10
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
1In the screen below, enter the account ID using the
numeric keys and press [Login].
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the
Clear key and enter the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered
ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter
the correct account ID.
By pressing [Check Counter], you can refer to the number
of pages printed and the number of pages scanned.
When the screen to enter the login user
name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to
enter the login user name and password appears.
Enter a login user name and password to login.
(Refer to Login/Logout on page 10-3.) If the user
has already registered the account information, the
account ID entry would be skipped. (Refer to
Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5.)
2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, press the
Authentication/Logout key to return to the account ID
entry screen.
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
********
Check Counter Login
Management
10-22
Adding an Account (Accounting List)
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.
Use the procedure below to register a new account.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Add/Edit]
of Accounting List, and then [Add].
5Press [Change] of Account Name.
6Enter the account name and press [OK]. The
Account screen reappears.
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
7Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID.
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered
cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
8Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 10-24.
9Press [Save] to add a new account on the Account
List.
Item Description
Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID
Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to
load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 10-24.
Account:
Print Restriction (Total):
Copy Restriction (Total):
Save
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Account ID:
Cancel
OffOff
Off
00001000
Print Restr. (Full Color):
Off
Account Name:
01
Change
Status
Copy Restr. (SingleColor):
Off
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
1/2
Account
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-23
10
Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
Use the procedure below to manage accounts.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
[Add/Edit] of Accounting List.
5Select an account to change or delete.
NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down
menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Changing account information
1Press [Detail].
2Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and
steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine
to change account information.
3Press [Save].
4Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation
screen. The account information is changed.
Deleting an account
1Press [Delete].
2Press [Yes]. To delete the account.
User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List
1/2
Register an account that is permitted to use this machine. (Maximum: 1000)
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
Account Name Account ID
Detail
Name
Sort
00001000
00002000
00005000
00003000
00004000
Delete
Add
Close
Status
01
02
03
04
05
Account
Account
Account
Account
Account
10/10/2010 10:10
Account:
Print Restriction (Total):
Copy Restriction (Total):
Save
Copy Restr. (Full Color):
Account ID:
Cancel
OffOff
Off
00001000
Print Restr. (Full Color):
Off
Account Name:
01
Change
Status
Copy Restr. (SingleColor):
Off
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
1/2
Account
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-24
Copy/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying
and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 10-24, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 10-28 and
Print Accounting Report on page 10-32 for details.
Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting and then [Change] of Copy/Printer
Count.
5Press [Total] or [Split].
6Press [OK].
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Copy/Printer
Count on page 10-24.
Restriction Items
[Split] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item Detail
Copy Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for full-color, single-
color, and black and white copying.
Copy Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for full-color copying.
Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Limits the number of sheets used for single-color copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for color and black and
white printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two
optional FAX kits are installed.
Management
10-25
10
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:
* Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the FAX Port Restriction setting.
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.
1Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account
(Accounting List) on page 10-22.
2Press [Change] for the item to be restricted.
3Select the restriction mode.
If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+],[-] or
numeric keys to select the number of pages.
4Press [OK].
5Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be
restricted.
6Press [Save]. The restricted account is added.
Item Detail
Print Restriction (Total)
Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for full-color printing.
Print Restr. (SingleColor) Limits the number of sheets used for single-color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two
optional FAX kits are installed.
Item Description
Off No restriction given
Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to
9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
Account: - Copy Restriction (Total)
Restrict use of the functions.
Counter Limit
Off Limit
(1 - 9999999)
99999 page(s)
Cancel OK
Status
Reject Usage
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-26
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting and then [Change] of Apply Limit.
5Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert
Only].
6Press [OK].
Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can
set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Copy/Printer Count on
page 10-24.
Item Description
Immediately *
* The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job
will be rejected.
Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.
Management
10-27
10
Available Settings
[Split] selected for Copy/Printer Count
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If user login administration is disabled, the user
authentication screen appears. Enter a login user
name and password, and press [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges.
Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page
10-5 for the default login user name and password.
4
Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default
Setting and then [Next] of Default Counter Limit.
Item Detail
Copy Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
color and black and white copying.
Copy Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
full-color copying.
Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
single-color copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used
for color and black and white printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending
faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Item Detail
Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used
for copying and printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
full-color printing.
Print Restr. (SingleColor) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
single-color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending
faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Management
10-28
5Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and
then press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter
the default restriction on the number of sheets.
6Press [OK].
7
To set another default restriction, repeat steps 5 to 6.
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting.
A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Status
User Login/Job Accounting - Copy Restriction (Total)
Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account
by counter.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
(1 - 9999999)
Cancel OK
99999
10/10/2010 10:10
Item Detail
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total
number of pages used. You can also use [Count by Paper Size] and
[Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the number of pages used.
• For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white,
full-color and single-color copying as well as the total pages
used.
• For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white
and full-color printing as well as the total pages used.
• You can use [Count by Paper Size] to check the number of
pages used in the paper size set in Count by Paper Size on page
10-30 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes.
• You can use the [Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the
number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2-
sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the pages used in
Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode, Combine (4in1)
mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and
other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX Transmission Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX Transmission Time*
* Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
Management
10-29
10
Total Job Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
[Next] of Total Job Accounting.
5Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
6Confirm the count and press [Close].
7Press [Start] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.
8Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
counter is reset.
Each Job Accounting
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.
Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check]
of Each Job Accounting.
User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting
Printed Pages:
Close
Scanned Pages:
Counter Reset:
FAX Transmission Pages:
Check
Start
Status
Check
FAX Transmission Time:
0:00:102
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-30
5Select the account to check the count.
NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down
menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
account name or account ID.
To display an account other than your own account,
press [Other Account].
6Press [Detail].
7Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
8Confirm the count and press [Close].
9Press [Start] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.
10
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
counter will be reset.
Count by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE: Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports. Refer to
Print Accounting Report on page 10-32.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If no
media type is specified, usage is counted for all media types of that size.
Use the procedure below to count the number of pages.
1Press the System Menu key.
2Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
4Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting, [Next] of Count by Paper Size,
[Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On].
User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting
2/2
Maintain a separate counter for each account (department).
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
Account Name Account ID
Detail
NameSort
00006000
Close
Status
06 Account
Other Account
10/10/2010 10:10
Printed Pages:
Close
Scanned Pages:
Counter Reset:
FAX Transmission Pages:
Check
Start
2(20) 0:00:10
Account:
Status
Check
FAX Transmission Time:
10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-31
10
5Select the paper size.
6Press [Media Type] to specify media type.
7Select the media type and press [OK].
8Press [Close].
User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1
Select the paper sizes and types to count.
On
Off
Cancel OK
A5
Plain
Media Type
B4
A3 A4
B5 Folio
Letter Statement
Ledger Legal
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
Management
10-32
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When Split is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the
cassette.
2Press the System Menu key.
3Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
4If the user authentication screen appears, enter
your login user name and password and then press
[Login]. For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User
(Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login
user name and password.
5Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
[Print] of Print Accounting Report.
6Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.
Firmware Version
ACCOUNT.REPORT
Management
10-33
10
Unknown ID Job
The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from an unknown account ID (i.e. unsent ID) can be
specified. Refer to Unknown ID Job on page 10-10 for details.
Checking and Printing Counter
Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets
printed and scanned.
You can check the number of pages printed in each
paper size by pressing [Printed Pages by Paper Size].
Counter
10/10/2010 10:10Status
Close
Print
Status Page
Printed Pages
Black&White:
TotalPrinterCopy
Scanned Pages
Originals:
TotalFAXCopy
1800200600
FAX
Full Color:
SingleColor:
Total:
Others
1000600300 100
800500200 100
200100100 0
20001200600 200
1000
Printed Pages
by Paper Size
Management
10-34
11-1
11 Maintenance
This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.
• Regular Maintenance........................................................................11-2
• Cleaning..........................................................................................11-15
Maintenance
11-2
Regular Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement
When toner runs low, "Toner is running out" appears in the touch panel. Make sure you have a new toner
container available for replacement.
When the touch panel displays Toner is empty., replace the toner.
Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may
deteriorate output quality.
NOTE:
• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine
may cause image defects and product failure.
• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of
new products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify
individuals, and is only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. The procedures here represent the yellow
toner container.
1Open the front cover.
2Turn the toner container release lever to the vertical
position.
(Y) (C)
(M)
(K)
Maintenance
11-3
11
3Remove the toner container and insert it into the
provided plastic disposal bag.
4Remove the new toner container from the box.
5Hold the toner container vertically and hit the upper
part about 3 times. Invert the toner container so that
the other end is up, and hit in the same way.
Maintenance
11-4
6Hold the toner container horizontally and shake
from side to side about 3 times.
7Hold the toner container with both hands and gently
push it all the way in.
8After pushing the toner container all the way in, turn
the toner container release lever to the horizontal
position.
9Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative.
The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations
Maintenance
11-5
11
Waste Toner Box Replacement
When "Waste toner box almost full" appears in the touch panel, make sure you have a new waste toner box
available for replacement.
When the touch panel shows “Check waste toner box.”, immediately replace the waste toner box.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
1Open the front cover.
2Press the release button (1) and pull out the waste
toner tray (2).
3Close the cap and remove the old waste toner box
diagonally upward.
Maintenance
11-6
4Insert into the provided plastic disposal bag.
5Gently remove the new waste toner box from its
packaging and open the cap.
6Install a new waste toner box.
Maintenance
11-7
11
7Press the specified position to close the waste
toner tray. When the tray reaches the correct
position, it locks in place with a clicking sound.
8Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative.
The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.
Maintenance
11-8
Replacing Staples
A staple cartridge is installed in the optional 1,000-sheet finisher, 4,000-sheet finisher, and center-fold unit.
If a message displays indicating that staples have run out, the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished
with staples.
NOTE: If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your service representative or the place of purchase.
Follow the steps below to refill staples.
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1Open the front cover.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple
cartridge holder.
NOTE: The staple cartridge can only be removed
when it contains no more staples.
Maintenance
11-9
11
4Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder.
5Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6Close the front cover.
Maintenance
11-10
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
The 4,000-sheet finisher contains staple cartridge holder A.
The optional folding unit contains staple cartridge holders B and C. The refill procedure for staple cartridge
holders B and C are the same as for staple cartridge holder A.
Refilling Staple Cartridge Holder A
NOTE: See page 11-11 to refill staple cartridge holder B/C of the optional folding unit.
1Open the front cover 1.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple
cartridge holder.
NOTE: The staple cartridge can only be removed
when it contains no more staples.
Maintenance
11-11
11
4Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder.
5Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6Close the front cover 1.
Refilling Staple Cartridge Holders B/C (Option)
Follow the steps below to refill staples for the optional folding unit. Follow the same procedure to refill staple
cartridge holders B and C.
1Open the front cover 1 and 2.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder B or C.
Maintenance
11-12
3Open the stopper and remove the empty staple
cartridge.
NOTE: The staple cartridge can only be removed
when it contains no more staples.
4Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge holder and close the stopper.
5Re-install the staple cartridge holder.
When re-installing, align the triangle marks on the
staple cartridge holder and the staple unit. The
staple cartridge holder will click into place when it
has been inserted correctly.
6Close the front cover 1 and 2.
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
If a message is displayed on the machine operation panel indicating that the waste punch box is full, be sure to
empty the scraps in the punch waste box.
Leave the main power switch on the machine switched ON ( | ) while performing this procedure.
Maintenance
11-13
11
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1Open the front cover.
2Grasp the punch waste box handle and remove the
box from the Document Finisher.
NOTE: Take care not to spill the waste hole punch
scraps when removing the container.
3Dispose of the hole punch scraps appropriately.
4Re-install the punch waste box. Align it with the
guides in the Document Finisher.
5Close the front cover.
Maintenance
11-14
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
1Open the front cover 1.
2Grasp the punch waste box handle and remove the
box from the Document Finisher.
NOTE: Take care not to spill the waste hole punch
scraps when removing the container.
3Dispose of the hole punch scraps appropriately.
4Re-install the punch waste box. Align it with the
guides in the Document Finisher.
5Close the front cover 1.
Maintenance
11-15
11
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Platen Cover / Glass Platen
Wipe the backside of the platen cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft
cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Platen Cover
Glass Platen
Maintenance
11-16
Slit Glass/Dual scanning area
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor, clean the slit glass with
the supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires
cleaning. When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit also.
NOTE: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water,soap or solvents for cleaning.
1Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth
compartment.
2Open the document processor and wipe the slit
glass (a).
Hold
1. Open the document processor.
2. Clean the slit glass surface and the white
reading guide on the document processor with
the dry accessory cloth.
3. Close the document processor and press [End].
Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause
black streaks to appear in the output.
The slit glass requires cleaning.
02/03
End
Status 10/10/2010 10:10
a
Maintenance
11-17
11
3Wipe the white guide (b) on the document
processor.
4If you are using the dual scan document processor,
open the top cover of the document processor and
wipe the glass (scanning unit).
5Wipe the white roller.
6Close the document processor top cover and return
the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth
compartment.
7Press [End] on the touch panel.
b
Maintenance
11-18
Separator
Clean the separator regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum output quality.
1Open the front cover.
2Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).
3Pull up the lever and open the right cover 1.
4As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the separator
by moving the brush from side to side along the
separator.
Maintenance
11-19
11
5Press the specified position of the right cover 1 to
close.
6Put away the cleaning brush and close the front
cover.
Transfer Roller
1Open the front cover.
2Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).
3Pull up the lever and open the right cover 1.
Maintenance
11-20
4As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the transfer
roller by moving the brush from side to side along
the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear
at the right end of the roller.
5Press the specified position of the right cover 1 to
close.
6Put away the cleaning brush and close the front
cover.
12-1
12 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.
• Solving Malfunctions.........................................................................12-2
• Responding when Error Messages...................................................12-8
• Clearing Paper Jams ......................................................................12-22
Troubleshooting
12-2
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
An application does
not start.
Is the Auto Panel Reset time
short?
Set the Auto Panel Reset time to
30 seconds or more.
9-75
The operation panel
does not respond
when the main power
switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
2-6
Pressing the Start key
does not produce
copies.
Is there a message on the
touch panel?
Determine the appropriate
response to the message and
respond accordingly.
12-8
Is the machine in Sleep
mode?
Press the Power key to recover
the machine from Sleep mode. The
machine will be ready to copy
within a minute.
2-10
Blank sheets are
ejected.
Are the originals loaded
correctly?
When placing originals on the
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
2-44
When placing originals in the
optional document processor,
place them face-up.
2-46
— Check that the application software
is correctly operated.
—
Printouts are too
light.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-27
Have you changed the
density?
Select appropriate density level. 3-10
9-66
Is the toner distributed evenly
within the toner container?
Shake the toner container from
side to side several times.
11-2
Is there a message indicating
the addition of toner?
Replace the toner container. 11-2
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. 9-57
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-67
— Run [Developer Refresh]. 9-73
— Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. 9-73
— Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
9-4
Troubleshooting
12-3
12
Printouts are too dark. Have you changed the
density?
Select appropriate density level. 3-10
9-66
— Run [Calibration]. 9-72
— Run [Developer Refresh]. 9-73
Copies have a moire
pattern (dots grouped
together in patterns
and not aligned
uniformly).
Is the original a printed
photograph?
Set the image quality to [Printer
Output] or [Book/Magazine] in
[Photo].
3-10
Printouts are not
clear.
Did you choose appropriate
image quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality. 3-10
Dirt on the print side
of the paper.
Is the platen or the document
processor dirty?
Clean the platen or the document
processor.
11-15
— Brush the transfer roller clean. 11-19
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-67
— Run [Developer Refresh]. 9-73
— Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. 9-73
Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in
very humid conditions?
Use in an environment that has
suitable humidity.
—
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-67
Images are skewed. Are the originals placed
correctly?
When placing originals on the
platen, align them with the original
size indicator plates.
2-46
When placing originals in the
optional document processor, align
the original width guides securely
before placing the originals.
2-46
Is the paper loaded
correctly?
Check the position of the paper
width guides.
2-29
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
12-4
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded
correctly?
Load the paper correctly. 2-29
— Change the orientation in which the
paper is positioned.
xli
2-29
2-36
Is the paper of the supported
type? Is it in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
2-29
Is the paper curled, folded or
wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper. 2-29
Are there any loose scraps or
jammed paper in the
machine?
Remove any jammed paper. 12-22
Printouts have black
lines.
Are the slit glass and the
Dual scanning area dirty?
Clean the slit glass and the Dual
scanning area.
11-16
— Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. 9-73
Printouts are wrinkled
or curled.
Is the paper separator of the
paper feed unit dirty?
Clean the paper separator. 11-18
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-27
— Change the orientation in which the
paper is positioned.
xli
2-29
2-36
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
—
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. 3-2
Are the printer cable and
network cable connected?
Connect the correct printer cable
and network cable securely.
2-3
Was the machine powered
on before the printer cable
was connected?
Power on the machine after
connecting the printer cable.
2-3
Is the print job paused? Resume printing. 8-3
Documents are
printed improperly.
Are the application software
settings at the PC set
properly?
Check that the printer driver and
application software settings are
set properly.
—
Cannot print with USB
memory.
USB memory not
recognized.
Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host
settings.
9-104
— Check that the USB memory is
securely plugged into the machine.
—
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
12-5
12
When displaying an
image sent from the
machine on the PC, an
image size is shrunk
vertically or
horizontally.
Have you selected
200×100dpi Normal or
200×400dpi Super Fine for
the scan resolution?
Select a scan resolution other than
200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi
Super Fine when sending an
image.
—
Dirt on the top edge
or back of the paper.
Check the paper chute and
the ramp.
Open the right cover and check for
toner on the paper ramp inside the
paper transfer unit. Clean the
paper ramp using a soft, dry, lint-
free cloth.
—
Part of the image is
periodically faint or
blurred.
— Run [Developer Refresh]. 9-73
Part of the image is
periodically faint or
shows white lines.
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-67
White dots appear on
the image.
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-67
Skewed-color
printout.
— Run [Calibration]. 9-72
— Run [Color Registration]. 9-69
Print on the back of
the sheet is visible on
the front.
— Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to
[On].
4-42
6-25
9-22
The background
density is obtrusive.
— Run [Background Density Adj.]. 4-40
6-22
9-21
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
12-6
Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment in the
System Menu. is
displayed.
Over long periods of use, the
effects of the ambient
temperature and humidity
can cause color output hues
to vary slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. 9-72
Colors appear
different than you
anticipated.
Did you choose appropriate
image quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality. 3-10
Have you loaded color copy
paper into the paper tray?
Load color copy paper into the
paper tray.
2-28
— Run [Calibration]. 9-72
— Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. 9-72
—When making copies
Adjust the color balance.
4-35
When printing from a computer
Adjust the color using the printer
driver.
5-3
Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable
connected?
Connect the correct network cable
securely.
2-3
Have the network settings for
the equipment been
configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings
properly.
9-92
Have the folder sharing
settings been configured
properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder
properties.
3-25
Has the SMB protocol been
set to [On]?
Set the SMB protocol setting to
[On].
3-25
Has the [Host Name] been
entered properly?
Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.*
3-25
Has the [Path] been entered
properly?
Check the share name for the
shared folder.
3-25
Has the [Login User Name]
been entered properly?
Check the domain name and login
user name.**
3-25
Has the same domain name
been used for the [Host
Name] and [Login User
Name]?
Delete the domain name and
backslash ("\") from the [Login
User Name].
3-25
Has the [Login Password]
been entered properly?
Check the login password. 3-25
Have exceptions for
Windows Firewall been
configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows
Firewall properly.
3-36
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
12-7
12
* You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
** You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
Cannot send via SMB. Do the time settings for the
equipment, domain server,
and data destination
computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server,
and data destination computer to
the same time.
—
Is the touch panel displaying
Send error.?
Refer to Responding to Send Error.12-18
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
12-8
Responding when Error Messages
If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
Alphanumeric
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Acceptable fold count
exceeded.
Is the acceptable number of
sheets exceeded?
Press [Continue] to print using Fold
per acceptable number of sheets.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
4-11
Acceptable staple
count exceeded.*
Is the acceptable number of
sheets exceeded?
Press [Continue] to print without
using Staple. Press [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
—
Activation error. — Failed to activate the application.
Contact administrator.
—
— Expansion Authentication is disabled.
Turn the main power switch off and
on. If the error exists, contact
administrator.
—
Add paper in cassette
#.
Is the indicated cassette out
of paper?
Load paper.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
2-27
Add paper in Multi
Purpose tray.
Is the paper of the selected
size loaded in the multi
purpose tray?
Load paper.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
2-32
Box is not found. — The specified box cannot be found.
Job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Box limit exceeded.* — Document box is full, and no further
storage is available. Job is canceled.
Press [End].
—
— Repeat Copy box is full, and no
further repeat copy is available.
Press [Continue] to print scanned
pages.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Cannot connect to
Authentication
Server.*
— Set machine time to match the
server’s time.
2-12
— Check the domain name. 10-2
— Check the host name. 10-2
— Check the connection status with the
server.
—
Troubleshooting
12-9
12
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Cannot duplex print
on this paper.*
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be duplex
printed?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, duplex is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-13
Cannot find the
destination computer.
Check the computer.
Is the machine connected to
the network?
Make sure that the machine is
connected to the network.
2-3
Is the PC to which the
scanned image is to be sent
connected to the network?
Make sure that the destination PC is
connected to the network.
2-3
Has the setting of the
shared folder to which the
scanned image is to be sent
been changed?
Return the setting for the destination
shared folder to the previous setting.
3-30
Is the account information
(user ID, password) used to
access the shared folder to
which the scanned image is
to be sent incorrect?
Enter the correct user ID and
password. For a domain
environment, the domain name must
be specified.
[User ID]@[Domain Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
—
Cannot fold this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be folded?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, fold is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
4-11
Cannot offset this
paper.*
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be offset?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, offset is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-15
Cannot print the
specified number of
copies.*
— Only one copy is available.
Press [Continue] to continue printing.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Cannot process this
job.*
— Restricted by Authorization settings.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
— Restricted by Job Accounting.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
10-20
Troubleshooting
12-10
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Cannot punch at the
specified position.
Have you selected a
position that cannot be
punched?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, punch is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-21
Cannot punch this
paper.
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be
punched?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, punch is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
3-21
Cannot staple at the
specified position.
Have you selected a
position that cannot be
stapled?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, staple is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
—
Cannot staple this
paper.*
Did you select a paper size/
type that cannot be stapled?
If the selected paper is not changed
and [Continue] is pressed, staple is
released.
Select the available paper. Press
[Continue] to print.
—
Cannot use ##### due
to a failure.
— Call service. —
Check the document
processor.
Is the document processor
open?
Close the document processor. —
Is the top cover of the
document processor open?
Close the document processor cover. —
Check the folder
setting at the PC.
Is the machine connected to
the network?
Make sure that the machine is
connected to the network.
2-3
Is the PC to which the
scanned image is to be sent
connected to the network?
Make sure that the destination PC is
connected to the network.
2-3
Has the setting of the
shared folder to which the
scanned image is to be sent
been changed?
Return the setting for the destination
shared folder to the previous setting.
3-30
Is the account information
(user ID, password) used to
access the shared folder to
which the scanned image is
to be sent incorrect?
Enter the correct user ID and
password. For a domain
environment, the domain name must
be specified.
[User ID]@[Domain Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
—
Troubleshooting
12-11
12
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Check the main unit
right tray.
Is the main unit right tray
closed?
Open the main unit right tray. —
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Check the paper in
the multi purpose
tray.
— The paper size is different. Set
selected size paper and press
[Continue].
2-36
Check the side
feeder.
— The side feeder is not installed
correctly. Attach the side feeder.
—
Check waste toner
box.
— The waste toner box is not installed
correctly. Set it correctly.
11-5
Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. 11-5
Confidential
document was
detected.
— The machine detects the document
guard pattern. Job is canceled. Press
[End].
9-105
Empty the punch
waste box.
Is the punch waste box full? Follow the instructions on the touch
panel and empty the punch waste
box.
11-12
Error occurred at
cassette #.
— Open the cassette. Check inside the
machine and remove the paper.
—
Error occurred at the
multi purpose tray.
— Remove the paper from the multi
purpose tray.
2-36
Failed to specify Job
Accounting.*
— Failed to specify Job Accounting
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Failed to store job
retention data.
— The job is canceled. Press [End]. —
Finisher left tray is full
of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Folding tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Troubleshooting
12-12
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Hard Disk error. — An error has occurred on the hard
disk. Job is canceled. Press [End].
The possible error codes and their
descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been
exceeded. Restart the system or
turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, divide the file
into smaller files. If the error
occurs after the file is divided, the
hard disk is damaged. Execute
[System Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the hard
disk to complete this operation.
Move data or delete unneeded
data.
—
Incorrect account ID. — The account ID was incorrect when
processing the job externally. The job
is canceled. Press [End].
—
Incorrect box
password.
— The box password was incorrect
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password.
— The login user name or password
was incorrect when processing the
job externally. The job is canceled.
Press [End].
—
Incorrect password. Is an incorrect password
entered?
Enter the correct password. ―
Install the punch
waste box.
— Follow the instructions on the touch
panel and install the punch waste
box.
—
Job separator tray is
full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper and press
[Continue]. Printing then resumes.
—
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.*
Is the acceptable printing
count restricted by Job
Accounting exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Troubleshooting
12-13
12
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
KPDL error.* — PostScript error has occurred.
The job is canceled. Press [End].
—
Machine failure. — Internal error has occurred. Make a
note of the error code displayed on
the touch panel. Call service.
—
Mailbox tray is full of
paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Main unit inner tray is
full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Main unit upper left
tray is full of paper.
Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper and press
[Continue]. Printing then resumes.
—
Maximum number of
scanned pages.
Is the acceptable scanning
count exceeded?
Cannot scan pages any more. Follow
the instructions on the touch panel.
—
Memory is full.* — The memory is full and the job cannot
be continued. Press [Continue] to
print the scanned pages. The print
job cannot be processed completely.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
— The process cannot be performed
due to insufficient memory. If only
[End] is available, press [End]. The
job will be canceled.
—
No item has been
entered. Please enter
item.
Did you enter an item name
for the created item in the
item create screen?
Enter an item name. ―
Paper left. — Remove paper from the document
finisher.
—
Paper jam. — If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the jammed
paper.
12-22
Please enter
password.
―Enter the password. ―
Troubleshooting
12-14
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Please select at least
one item.
Did you select an item in the
item selection screen?
Select an item. ―
Removable memory
error.*
Is writing to a removable
memory prohibited?
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Press
[End].
Possible error codes are as follows:
01: Connect a removable memory
that can be written to.
—
—
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Press
[End].
Possible error codes are as follows:
01:
The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Restart the system or turn the
power OFF/ON. If the error still
occurs, the removable memory is
not compatible with the machine.
Use the removable memory
formatted by this machine. If the
removable memory cannot be
formatted, it is damaged. Connect
a compatible removable memory.
7-22
Troubleshooting
12-15
12
* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Removable memory
is full.*
— This job is canceled. Press [End].
Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete unneeded
files.
—
Replace all originals
and press [Continue].
— Remove originals from the document
processor, put them back in their
original order, and place them again.
Press [Continue] to resume printing.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
2-46
Remove originals in
the document
processor.
Are there any originals left in
the document processor?
Remove originals from the document
processor.
—
Scanner memory is
full.*
—
Scanning cannot be performed due to
insufficient memory of the scanner.
Follow the instructions on the touch
panel.
—
Send error.* — An error has occurred during
transmission. The job is canceled.
Press [End]. Refer to Responding to
Send Error for the error code and
corrective actions.
12-18
Staple is empty.* Has the document finisher
run out of staples?
If the staples are depleted, the
machine will stop and the location of
staple depletion will be indicated on
the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instructions to replace the staple case.
Press [Continue] to print without stapling.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Staple is empty.
(Manual Staple)
Has staple cartridge holder
A run out of staples?
Add staples to staple cartridge holder
A.
11-10
Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the jammed
staple.
—
System error. — System error has occurred. Follow
the instructions on the touch panel.
—
Troubleshooting
12-16
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
The cover is open. Is there any cover which is
open?
Close the cover indicated on the
touch panel.
—
The folding tray is
open.
— Set the folding tray. —
The folding unit is
open.
— Close the folding unit. —
The phone receiver is
off the hook.
— Put down the receiver. —
The removable
memory is not
formatted.
Is the removable memory
formatted by this machine?
Perform [Format] on this machine. —
The slit glass requires
cleaning.
— Clean the slit glass using the cleaning
cloth supplied with the document
processor.
11-16
Toner is empty.
[C][M][Y][K]
— Replace the toner container to our
specified toner container.
11-2
Toner is running out.
[C][M][Y][K]
— It is almost time to replace the toner
container. Obtain a new toner
container.
—
Tray # is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage
capacity exceeded?
Remove the paper. Printing then
resumes.
—
Unknown toner
installed.
Is the installed toner
container our own brand?
We will not be liable for any damage
caused by the use of third party
supplies in this machine.
—
Unknown Toner
Installed. PC
[C][M][Y][K]
Does the installed toner
container's regional
specification match the
machine's?
Install the specified container. —
Troubleshooting
12-17
12
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Warning for high
temperature. Adjust
the room
temperature.
— Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
—
Warning for low
temperature. Adjust
the room
temperature.
— Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
—
Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again later. —
Waste toner box
almost full.
— It is almost time to replace the waste
toner box. Obtain a new waste toner
box.
—
You cannot use this
system.
Is a workflow registered? Close FMU Connection and create a
workflow. To create a workflow, File
Management Utility (PC application)
is required.
File
Manageme
nt Utility
User Guide
Troubleshooting
12-18
Responding to Send Error
When an error occurs during transmission, Send Error appears. Check the error code and error message below,
and follow the corresponding corrective actions.
Error
Code Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page
1101 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the host name of the SMTP
server on the Command Center RX.
2-25
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP.
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB.
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.
- Login user name and login
password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain
user, specify the domain name.
- Host name
- Path
3-25
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the following on the Command
Center RX.
- SMTP login user name and login
password
- POP3 login user name and login
password
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.
- Login user name and login
password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain
user, specify the domain name.
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.
- Login user name and login
password
NOTE: If the sender is a domain
user, specify the domain name.
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
3-25
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
3-25
Troubleshooting
12-19
12
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.
NOTE: If the address is rejected by
the domain, you cannot send the e-
mail.
3-24
Failed to send i-FAX. Check the i-FAX address.
NOTE: If the address is rejected by
the domain, you cannot send i-FAX.
FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Chapter 8
"Internet Faxing
(i-FAX) (Option)"
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on
the Command Center RX.
2-25
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on
the Command Center RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the
Command Center RX.
Failed to send i-FAX. Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on
the Command Center RX.
FAX System (V)
Operation Guide
Chapter 8
"Internet Faxing
(i-FAX) (Option)"
1106 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the sender address of SMTP
on the Command Center RX.
2-25
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol
settings on the Command Center RX.
2-25
1132 Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP
server.
- Is FTPS available?
- Is the encryption available?
2-25
2101 Failed to send via SMB.
Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network and SMB settings.
Check the network and FTP settings.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
- Host name and IP address
- Port number
2-25
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the network and Command
Center RX.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
-
POP3 server name of the POP3 user
- SMTP server name
Error
Code Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page
Troubleshooting
12-20
2102
2103
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP
server.
- Is FTP available?
- The server is not operating properly.
—
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
2201 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
—
2202 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send i-FAX.
2203 Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
2231 Failed to send via FTP.
2204 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the e-mail size limit of the
SMTP settings on the Command
Center RX.
2-25
3101 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the authentication methods of
both the sender and the recipient.
—
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
3201 Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX.
Check the SMTP user authentication
method of the recipient.
—
Error
Code Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page
Troubleshooting
12-21
12
Responding when Authentication Server Connection Error
If an error occurs when connecting to the authentication server, check the error message and follow the
corresponding corrective action that appears on the touch panel.
0007
4201
4701
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
— Turn the main power switch off and
back on. If this error occurs several
times, make a note of the displayed
error code and contact your service
representative.
—
9181 — The scanned original exceeds the
acceptable number of pages of 999.
Send the excess pages separately.
—
Symptom Corrective Actions Reference Page
Cannot connect to
authentication server.
Set machine time to match the
server’s time.
2-12
Check the domain name. 10-2
Check the host name. 10-2
Check the connection status with the
server.
—
Error
Code Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page
Troubleshooting
12-22
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper
Jam. and the machine will stop. Refer to these
procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Jam Location Indicators
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding
to the affected component in the machine. Clearing instructions will also be displayed.
10/10/2010 10:10
Hold
JAM
Paper jam.
02/04
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
Status
10/10/2010 10:10
Hold
JAM
Paper jam.
02/04
1. Remove the paper from
the paper ejector.
2. Open main unit right cover 1 and
remove the paper.
Remove the paper from
the multi purpose tray.
3. Open fuser cover (A1) and
remove the paper.
4. Close the cover.
Status
A
D
I
F
L
LL
M
M
M
M
K
K
H
K
K
IJ G
K
K
K
K
B
CE
E
E
G
C
C
Paper Jam
Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page
A Cassette 1 12-23
B Cassette 2 12-24
C Cassette 3 or 4 (Option) 12-25
D Multi Purpose Tray 12-29
E Inside the right cover 1, 3 or 4 12-30
F Duplex unit 12-32
G Fixing unit 12-35
H Document processor (Option) 12-36
I Job Sparator (Option) 12-38
J Bridge Unit 12-40
K Document finisher (Option) 12-41
12-42
L Cassette 5 (Option) 12-49
M Cassette 6,7 (Option) 12-51
Troubleshooting
12-23
12
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine
resumes with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
Precautions with Paper Jams
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
• Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be
printed again.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Pull out cassette 1.
Troubleshooting
12-24
4Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
5Push cassette 1 back in place securely.
6Press the specified position to close right cover 1.
Cassette 2
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2.
1Open right cover 3.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
12-25
12
3Pull out cassette 2.
4Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
5Push cassette 2 back in place securely.
6Close right cover 3.
Optional Cassettes 3 and 4
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)
1If you are using the optional side feeder, pull up the
release lever and separate the side feeder from the
multifunction machine.
Troubleshooting
12-26
2Open right cover 4.
3Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
4Pull out the cassette in use.
5Remove the jammed paper.
6Push the cassette back in place securely.
7Close right cover 4.
Troubleshooting
12-27
12
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
1If you are using the optional side feeder, pull up the
release lever and separate the side feeder from the
multifunction machine.
2Open right cover 4.
3Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
4Pull out cassettes 3 and 4.
Troubleshooting
12-28
5Remove the jammed paper.
6Pull out the paper feed unit (B1).
7Open the paper feed unit cover (B2) and remove
the jammed paper.
8Close the paper feed unit cover (B2) and push the
paper feed unit all the way back in.
9Push the cassette back in place securely.
10
Close right cover 4.
Troubleshooting
12-29
12
Multi Purpose Tray
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray.
1Remove all sheets of paper from the multi purpose
tray.
2If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you
to remove.
3
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
4Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
Troubleshooting
12-30
5Press the specified position to close right cover 1.
Inside the Right Covers 1, 3 and 4
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside right cover 1, 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
1Remove all sheets of paper from the multi purpose
tray.
2If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you
to remove.
3Open the right cover where the paper is jammed
inside.
Troubleshooting
12-31
12
4Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
5If you are using the optional document finisher,
follow step on page 12-40 to remove jammed paper
in the optional bridge unit
.
6Close the right cover.
Troubleshooting
12-32
Duplex unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Press the specified position to close left cover 1.
Troubleshooting
12-33
12
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Press the specified position to close
right
cover 1.
4Open the right cover 2.
Troubleshooting
12-34
5Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
6Close the right cover 2.
7Pull out cassette 1 and remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
8Push cassette 1 back in place securely.
Troubleshooting
12-35
12
Fixing unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the fixing unit.
1
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Open the fuser cover.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a
danger of getting burned.
4Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
Troubleshooting
12-36
5If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
6Push the fuser cover back in place, and press the
specified position to close right cover 1.
Optional Document Processor
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor or document processor (Dual
scan DP).
1Remove the original from the original tray.
2Open the document processor top cover.
Troubleshooting
12-37
12
3Remove the jammed original.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
If the original is difficult to remove, turn the dial. The
original will scroll out to a position where it can be
removed easily.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
If you are using the document processor, go to step
4. If you are using the document processor (Dual
scan DP), go to step 6.
4Lift up the reverse unit.
5Remove the jammed original.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
6Put the reverse unit back in its original place and
close the document processor top cover.
7Reload the originals on the document processor
tray.
Troubleshooting
12-38
Optional Job Separator
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator.
Inner Job Separator
1If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot of the inner job separator, pull it toward your
side to remove it.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
2
Pull up right cover 1 lever and open the right cover 1.
3Press the lever and open the fuser cover.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a
danger of getting burned.
4Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
Troubleshooting
12-39
12
5Press the indicated position to close right cover 1.
Right Job Separator
1If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot of the right job separator, pull it toward your
side to remove it.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
2
Follow step 2 onward on page 12-38 to remove
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
12-40
Bridge Unit (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in the optional bridge unit, follow the steps below to remove the jam.
1Pull out the relay unit.
2Open the relay unit cover and remove the jammed
paper.
3Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
4Close the relay unit cover and push the bridge unit
all the way back in.
Troubleshooting
12-41
12
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in the optional 1,000-sheet finisher, follow the steps below to remove the jam.
1If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
2Open the front cover.
3Open feed guide D1 and remove the jammed
paper.
4Open the top tray and then open feed guide D2.
Troubleshooting
12-42
5Turn the conveyor knob to the left to feed the paper
along to enable easy removal.
6Close the open feed guides, and close the top and
front covers.
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in the optional 4,000-sheet finisher, follow the steps below to remove the jam.
Coupling Section
1Open the front cover 1.
2Open conveyor guide (D1) and remove the jammed
paper.
3Close the conveyor guide (D1) and front cover 1.
Troubleshooting
12-43
12
Tray A
1If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
2Open the front cover 1.
3Open the conveyor guide (D6) and remove the
jammed paper.
4Close the conveyor guide (D6).
5Open the conveyor guide (D4) and remove the
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
12-44
NOTE: If it is difficult to remove the jammed paper,
turn feed knob D3 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
6Close the conveyor guide (D4) and front cover 1.
Tray B
1If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection
slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
2Open the front cover 1.
3Open the conveyor guide (D2).
Troubleshooting
12-45
12
4Turn the conveyor knob (D3) to the left to feed the
paper along to enable easy removal.
5Close the conveyor guide (D2) and front cover 1.
Tray C
1Open the upper left cover.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Close the upper left cover.
Troubleshooting
12-46
Conveyor / Inner Tray
1Open the front cover 1.
2Open the conveyor guide (D2).
3Turn the conveyor knob (D3) to the left to feed the
paper along to enable easy removal.
4Follow step 2 onward on page 12-43 to remove
jammed paper.
Mailbox (Option)
1Open the mailbox cover and remove the jammed
paper.
2Close the mailbox cover.
Troubleshooting
12-47
12
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Ejection Section
1Lift up the folding tray and remove any jammed
paper.
2Push the folding unit release lever and pull out the
folding unit.
3Press the release lever, open the left cover of the
center fold unit, and remove the jammed paper.
4Turn feed knob D9 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
5Close the folding unit left cover.
6Open the folding unit top cover and remove the
paper jam.
7Turn feed knob D9 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
8Close the folding unit top cover, and return the
folding unit to its original position.
Troubleshooting
12-48
Conveyor Section
1Open the front cover 1 and 2.
2Open the conveyor guide (D7) and remove the
jammed paper.
3Turn feed knob D5 until the jammed paper is in a
location where it is easy to remove.
If there is no paper jam in the conveyor guide (D7),
proceed to the following step.
4Close the conveyor guide (D7).
5Open the conveyor guide (D8) and remove the
jammed paper.
6Close the conveyor guide (D8).
7Remove the paper jammed in the center folding
unit.
8Close the front cover 1 and 2.
Troubleshooting
12-49
12
Cassette 5 (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in cassette 5 when you are using the optional side feeder (3,000-sheet), side feeder (500-
sheet x 3), or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2), follow the steps below to remove the jam.
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
1Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2Remove the paper from the connection port.
3Pull out cassette 5.
4Remove the jammed paper.
5Push the cassette back in place securely.
6Connect to the multifunction machine.
Troubleshooting
12-50
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) or Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x2)
1Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2Remove the paper from the connection port.
3Open the top cover and right cover 1.
4Remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
12-51
12
5Pull out cassette 5.
6Remove the jammed paper.
7Push the cassette back in place securely.
8Close the top cover and right cover 1.
9Connect to the multifunction machine.
Cassette 6,7 (Option)
If a paper jam occurs in cassette 6 or 7 when you are using the optional side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large
capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2), follow the steps below to remove the jam.
Side Feeder (500-sheet x3)
1Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2Follow steps 2 to 5 on page 12-50 to remove the
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
12-52
3Open the right cover 2.
4Remove the jammed paper.
5Pull out the cassette in use.
6Remove the jammed paper.
7Push the cassette back in place securely.
8Close the right cover 2.
9Connect to the multifunction machine.
Troubleshooting
12-53
12
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x2)
1Pull up the release lever and separate the side
feeder from the multifunction machine.
2Follow steps 2 to 5 on page 12-50 to remove the
jammed paper.
3Open the right cover 2.
4Remove the jammed paper.
5Pull out cassettes 6 and 7.
Troubleshooting
12-54
6Remove the jammed paper.
7Pull out the paper feed unit (B1).
8Open the paper feed unit cover (B2) and remove
the jammed paper.
9
Close the paper feed unit cover (B2) and push the
paper feed unit all the way back in.
10 Push the cassette back in place securely.
11
Close the right cover 2.
12
Connect to the multifunction machine.
Troubleshooting
12-55
12
Clearing a Staple Jam
If a message indicating a staple jam is displayed on the machine’s operation panel, remove the jammed staples.
Follow the steps below to remove jammed staples.
1,000-sheet Finisher
1Open the front cover.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3Open the cover plate (A) of the staple cartridge
holder and remove any jammed staples.
4Close the cover (A) plate of the staple cartridge
holder into its original position.
A
Troubleshooting
12-56
5Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6Close the front cover.
4,000-sheet Finisher
Staple cartridge holder A
1Open the front cover 1.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder A.
3Open the cover plate (A) of the staple cartridge
holder A and remove any jammed staples.
A
Troubleshooting
12-57
12
4Close the cover (A) plate of the staple cartridge
holder into its original position.
5Re-install the staple cartridge holder. The staple
cartridge holder will click into place when it has
been inserted correctly.
6Close the front cover 1.
Staple cartridge holder B/C
Follow the steps below to remove jammed staples from the optional folding unit.
1Open the front cover 1 and 2.
2Remove staple cartridge holder B or C.
Troubleshooting
12-58
3Open the cover plate (B) of the staple cartridge
holder and remove any jammed staples.
4Close the cover (B) plate of the staple cartridge
holder into its original position.
5Re-install the staple cartridge holder.
When re-installing, align the triangle marks on the
staple cartridge holder and the staple unit. The
staple cartridge holder will click into place when it
has been inserted correctly.
6Close the front cover 1 and 2.
B
Appendix-1
Appendix
• Optional Equipment ...............................................................Appendix-2
• Character Entry Method.........................................................Appendix-9
• Paper ...................................................................................Appendix-12
• Specifications.......................................................................Appendix-21
• Glossary...............................................................................Appendix-32
Appendix-2
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
* The side feeder (500-sheet x 3) or large capacity side feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) can be used on a 45/45 ppm
model or a 55/50 ppm model.
Document Processor Document Processor
(Dual scan DP)
4,000-sheet Finisher
1,000-sheet Finisher
Side Feeder
(3,000-sheet)
Paper Feeder
(500-sheet x 2)**
Large Capacity Feeder
(1,500-sheet x 2)**
Right Job Separator
Side Feeder
(500-sheet x 3)
Large Capacity Side Feeder
(500, 1,500-sheet x 2)
Mailbox
Inner Job Separator
Folding Unit
Hole Punch Unit
Hole Punch Unit
Platen Cover
Appendix-3
** If neither
a document finisher
nor a side feeder is installed on a 30/30 ppm model or a 35/35 ppm model, the
toppling prevention kit must be installed.
Key CounterFAX KitExpansion Memory
Gigabit Ethernet Board Document Table
Appendix-4
Document Processor
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-46.
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)
Two additional cassettes identical to the printer’s cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and
loading method are the same as the standard cassettes. Refer to The standard cassettes on page 2-29 for
loading paper.
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
capable of holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper. Refer to The Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-
sheet x 2) (Option) on page 2-32 for loading paper.
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding
up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper. Refer to Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option) on page 2-35 for
loading paper.
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3)
Three additional cassettes identical to cassette 1 can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as cassette 1.
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2)
In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install the additional cassette identical to cassette 1 and an
optional feeder (3,500-sheet) capable of holding up to 3,500 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
1,000-sheet Finisher
This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies
of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
4,000-sheet Finisher
This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting
multiple copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
User can select manual staple by operation button. A mail box and folding unit are also available as options.
Manual staple mode
You can staple copied paper manually without any copying operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set
the staple sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.
NOTE: Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.
If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position
button LEDs all blink. Add staples. For details, refer to Replacing Staples on page 11-8
Appendix-5
Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling
Use the buttons on the stapling control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.
1Press the stapling position button on the stapling control section.
The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple mode.
2Press the stapling position button to select the stapling position (Back / Front / 2 Points ).
Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the lamps light solidly.
3Straighten the edges of the paper well and place the paper
front side down in the shutter opening of the output unit.
If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled, place the
paper against the front guide (A).
If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled, place the paper
against the back guide (B).
If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at two points,
place the paper with the center aligned to the center point
between the two side guides (A and B).
CAUTION: Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.
NOTE: Press the stapling position button before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the stapling
position button cannot be used.
The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the paper.
4Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling button.
Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray A.
CAUTION: Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.
Finishing the manual staple mode
Press the stapling position button several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the
paper exit area closes. It means that manual stapling is finished. If no operation is performed for approx. 10
seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.
NOTE: The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed. For details, refer to
Manual Staple on page 9-39
Paper size
Paper weight
- 90 g/m2
( - 24.0 lb. Bond) 91 - 105 g/m2
(24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, 16K 65 sheets 50 sheets
A3, B4, Folio 30 sheets 30 sheets
Stapling position
button
Stapling
button / lamp
Stapling position
lamps
A
B
Appendix-6
Mailbox
Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple
computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-sheet finisher.
NOTE: To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the
printer driver, or change in the default settings. (For details, refer to Paper Output on page 9-15.)
Folding Unit
Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-
sheet finisher.
Inner Job Separator
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or,
specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and
printing of the received fax data.
CAUTION: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again.
NOTE:
• To ensure that paper is delivered to the Inner Job
Separator, select the output destination or change
the default setting. (For details, refer to the Paper
Output on page 9-15.)
• When removing paper from the Inner Job
Separator, pull it out at an angle.
Right Job Separator
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or,
specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and
printing of the received fax data.
Appendix-7
Key Counter
Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized
management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.
Inserting the Key Counter
Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot.
NOTE: When the key counter function is activated,
copies can only be made when a key counter is
inserted. If the key counter is not inserted, Insert key
counter. will be displayed.
FAX Kit
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it
with a computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines
which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to
receiving, the busy line time can be reduced. For further details, refer to Fax System (V) Operation Guide.
Expansion Memory
Image storage memory (128 MB) that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals.
Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative.
Gigabit Ethernet Board
The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Since the
kit was designed to work with TCP/IP, NetWare, NetBEUI, and AppleTalk protocols, in the same way as the main
unit, it fulfills the network printing demands on Windows, Macintosh, and UNIX environments. This expansion
kit is also compatible with ThinPrint.
Internet FAX Kit (A)
Installing the Internet FAX Kit (A) sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can
only be added when the FAX Kit is installed.
Data Security Kit
The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be
retrieved. The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security
because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
Appendix-8
Printed Document Guard Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on
the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the
pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank and prohibiting transmission.
Emulation Option
Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option
enables IBM Proprinter, DIABLO 630, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
USB Keyboard
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is
also available to install the keyboard on the MFP. Please contact your dealer or service representative for
information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one.
Document Table
Place original or other documents when using the machine. It has a drawer to accommodate clips.
Appendix-9
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained
below.
NOTE: Keyboard Layout
QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Press the
System Menu key, [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Keyboard Layout to choose the desired layout.
QWERTY layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
!@#$%^&* ( ) _+ ˜
QWE R T Y U I O P { }
ASDFGHJKL : "
ZXCVBNM<>?
|
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
0
128
1
2
4
5
6
7 8 9 10 11
3
No. Display/Key Description
1 Display Displays entered characters.
2 Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters.
3 Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display.
4 [Backspace] Press to delete a character to the left of the
cursor.
5 Keyboard Press a character to enter.
6 [Upper-case] Press to use upper-case letters.
7 [Lower-case] Press to use lower-case letters.
8 [No./Symbol] Press to enter numbers and symbols.
9 [Space] Press to insert a space.
Appendix-10
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
10 [Cancel] Press to cancel entered characters and return
to the screen before the entry.
11 [OK] Press to finalize entry and return to the screen
before the entry.
No. Display/Key Description
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ ˜
QWE R T Y U I O P { }
ASDFGHJKL : "
ZXCVBNM<>?
|
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
0
128
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #
$%& ’ ( ) * + , - . / :
;<=>?@[ \ ]^_` {
|}˜
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
0
128
12
No. Display/Key Description
12 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the
keyboard, press the cursor key and scroll the
screen to view other numbers or symbols to
enter.
Appendix-11
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter List A-1 for example.
1Press [Upper-case].
2Press [L]. The letter L is shown on the display.
3Press [Lower-case].
4Press [i], [s], [t] and [Space].
5Press [Upper-case].
6Press [A].
7Press [No./Symbol].
8Press [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard
containing [-] and [1].
9Press [-] and [1].
10 Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
L
!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ ˜
QWE R T Y U I O P { }
ASDFGHJKL : "
ZXCVBNM<> ?
|
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
1
128
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ]
a s d f g h j k l ; ’
z x c v b n m, . /
\
@_
List
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
4
128
Status
Use the keyboard to enter.
Backspace
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Lower-case
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #
$%& ’ ( ) * + , - . / :
;<=>?@[ \ ]^_` {
|}˜
List_A-1
10/10/2010 10:10
Input: characters
Limit: characters
8
128
Appendix-12
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassettes 1
Cassettes 2 and the optional paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
Optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
Recycled paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
216 × 340 mm
550 (64 g/m2)
500 (80 g/m2)
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
Recycled paper:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or
35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or
55/50ppm)
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
216 × 340 mm
550 (64 g/m2)
500 (80 g/m2)
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain paper (60 to 256 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 256 g/m2)
A4, B5, Letter 3,500 (64 g/m2)
3,000 (80 g/m2)
Appendix-13
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers
such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given
in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality
of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Colored paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R,
Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement,
Folio, 16K, 16K-R
Other sizes:
Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
165 (64 g/m2)
150 (80 g/m2)
Plain paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
Colored paper (60 to 300 g/m2)
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", 8K
55 (64 g/m2)
50 (80 g/m2)
Postcards
Oufuku hagaki (return postcard)
Postcards (100 × 148 mm)
Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)
30
Envelopes Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4
Other sizes:
Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
10
Transparency (OHP film) A4, A4-R, Letter, Letter-R 10
Appendix-14
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent
sections for further details.
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic
Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that
gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our
specifications.
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or
paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even
surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon.
Those types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper
content consists of cotton or other fibers.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes:
60 to 220 g/m2 (for the 30/30 ppm or 35/35ppm)
60 to 256 g/m2 (for the 45/45 ppm or 55/50ppm)
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 300 g/m2
Thickness 0.086 to 0.110 mm
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 to 6%
Pulp content 80% or more
Appendix-15
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner
angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery,
several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square
meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut
to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be
supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight
(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or
other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray
A6-R (105 × 148 mm) A3 (297 × 420 mm)
B6-R (128 × 182 mm) B4 (257 × 364 mm)
Hagaki (100×148mm) A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Oufuku hagaki (148 × 200 mm) A4-R (210 × 297 mm)
Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2") B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) B5-R (182 × 257 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm) A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm) Folio (210 × 330 mm)
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) Ledger
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")
Legal
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")
Letter
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")
Letter-R
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2") Statement-R
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) Oficio II
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) 12 × 18"
Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm)
8K (273 × 394 mm)
16K (273 × 197 mm)
16K-R (197 × 273 mm)
216 × 340 mm
Appendix-16
Thickness
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper
jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The
proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the
paper is supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes
paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between
4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to
be used for a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete
floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit,
it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the
paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper
that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are
rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially
careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should
have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Appendix-17
Specially treated paper:
We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to
the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
• Transparencies
• Preprinted paper
• Bond paper
• Recycled paper
• Thin paper (from 60 g/m2 to105 g/m2 or less)
• Letterhead
• Colored paper
• Prepunched paper
• Envelopes
• Cardstocks (Hagaki)
• Thick paper (from 106 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 or less)
• Labels
• Coated paper
• High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such
as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label
paper.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will
vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more
likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a
sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given
below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture
or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Appendix-18
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following
conditions.
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side
facing the machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
Hagaki
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan
them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled,
straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki
may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (available at post offices).
Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by
a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such
rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and
rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.
Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until
you are ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive
is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive
comes off in the machine.
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for
winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes to remain
in the output tray at once.
Criteria Specifications
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Burrs
Burrs
Appendix-19
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper
with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the
machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the
illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that
are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.
The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is
used. This composition of labels may cause more
problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the
top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of
labels, resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from
the carrier sheet before completing output.
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Top sheet
Not allowedAllowed
Carrier sheet
Appendix-20
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 2 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in
the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 2 of the Appendix. The colored ink must be
able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated
surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on page 2 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness may
be considered separately.
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Item Specifications
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight
(overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
Appendix-21
Specifications
IMPORTANT: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Machine
Item Description
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 12 × 18"/
A3)
Original Feed System Fixed
Paper Weight Cassette 1, 2 30/30 ppm model, 35/35 ppm model:
60 to 220 g/m2
45/45 ppm model, 55/50 ppm model:
60 to 256 g/m2
Multi Purpose
Tray
60 to 300 g/m2
Paper Type Cassette 1, 2 Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex:
Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose
Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1, 2 Maximum: 12 × 18"/A3 (Duplex: 12 × 18"/A3)
Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R (Duplex: Statement-R/A5-R)
Multi Purpose
Tray
Maximum: 12 × 48"/304.8 × 1220.0 mm
Minimum: Statement-R/A6-R
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Appendix-22
Printing
Speed 30/30 ppm
model
35/35 ppm
model
45/45 ppm
model
55/50 ppm
model
Black and White copying Full color copying
A4/Letter 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 15 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
B4/Legal 18 sheets/min 18 sheets/min
B5 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
A4/Letter 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 24 sheets/min 24 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
B4/Legal 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B5 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
A4/Letter 45 sheets/min 45 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 31 sheets/min 24 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
B4 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
Legal 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B5 45 sheets/min 45 sheets/min
A4/Letter 55 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 24 sheets/min 24 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 27 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B4 33 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
Legal 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
B5 55 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
First Print
Time
(A4, feed from
Cassette)
Black and
White
30/30 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 5.8 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 4.7 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 4.4 seconds or less
Full color 30/30 ppm model: 8.1 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 7.4 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 6.0 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 5.7 seconds or less
Warm-up Time
(22°C/71.6°F,
60%)
Power on 30/30 ppm model: 25 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 25 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
Low Power 30/30 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
Sleep 30/30 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
35/35 ppm model: 20 seconds or less
45/45 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
Item Description
Appendix-23
Paper
Capacity
Cassette 1 550 sheets (64 g/m2)
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Cassette 2 550 sheets (64 g/m2)
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose
Tray
A4/Letter or less
165 sheets (64 g/m2)
150 sheets (80 g/m2)
More than A4/Letter
55 sheets (64 g/m2)
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Output Tray
Capacity
Inner tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
with optional
inner job
separator
30 sheets (80 g/m2)
with optional
right job
separator
110 sheets (64 g/m2)
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Main Memory Standard 2048 MB
Maximum 2048 MB
Hard Disk 30/30:160GB (standard)
35/35:160GB (standard)
45/45:320GB (160GB × 2) (standard)
55/50:320GB (160GB × 2) (standard)
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
USBPort: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Option Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Fax: 2
A maximum of two interface options can be installed.
Only one network interface can be installed.
When a network interface is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Operating
Environment
Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity 15 to 80 %
Altitude 2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
(Main unit only)
26 19/32 × 30 3/16 ×29 13/32"
668 × 767 × 747 mm
Weight 251.3 lb/114 kg
Item Description
Appendix-24
Printer
Space Required (W × D)
(Using multi purpose tray)
38 29/64 × 30 3/16"
977 × 767 mm
Power Source 120 V Specification Model:
120 V AC 60 Hz 12.0 A
230 V Specification Model:
220 to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
Options Document Processor, Platen Cover , Document Table,
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2), Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2),
1,000-sheet Finisher, 4,000-sheet Finisher, Inner Job Separator,
Right Job Separator, Key Counter, FAX Kit, Expansion Memory,
Data Security Kit, Printed Document Guard Kit, Internet Fax Kit (A),
Folding Unit, Mailbox, Side Feeder (3,000-sheet),
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3), Gigabit Ethernet Board, Large Capacity
Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x2), Emulation Option, Hole Punch Unit,
USB Keyboard
Item Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Operating System Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7 ,
Windows Server 2008, Mac OS 10.x
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Item Description
Appendix-25
Scanner
*1 When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available Operating System : Windows XP
, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Vista
, Windows Server 2008,
Windows 7
*3 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
Item Description
System requirements CPU: 600Mhz or higher
RAM: 128MB or more
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi
(Resolution in FAX mode included)
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression),
PDF (high compression)
Scanning Speed *1 30/30 ppm model
35/35 ppm model
1-sided B/W 70 Images/min
Color 70 Images/min
2-sided B/W 100 Images/min
Color 80 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Text/Photo original)
45/45 ppm model
55/50 ppm model
1-sided B/W 80 Images/min
Color 80 Images/min
2-sided B/W 140 Images/min
Color 110 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Network Protocol TCP/IP
Transmission
System
PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB
FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan*2
WIA scan*3
Appendix-26
Document Processor (Option)
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item
Description
Document Processor Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Original Feed
Method
Automatic feed
Supported
Original Types
Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: Ledger/A3
Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R
Paper Weight 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m21-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
Loading Capacity 100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Mixed original sizes (auto selection):
30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
175 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Mixed original sizes (auto selection):
30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
22 23/32 × 21 13/64 × 7 5/64"
577 × 534 × 180 mm
23 5/8 × 20 13/64 × 6 45/64"
600 × 513 × 170 mm
Weight 32 lbs. or Less /14.5 kg or less
Item Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 27 35/64 × 12 13/32"
598 × 699.6 × 315 mm
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs. / Approx. 30 kg
Appendix-27
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) (Option)
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500, 1,500-sheet x 2) (Option)
Item Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method (No. Sheets: 3,000 (80 g/m2)/No. Sheets: 3,500 (64 g/
m2))
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 27 52/64 × 12 26/64"
598 × 706.6 × 315 mm
Weight Approx. 63.93 lbs / Approx. 29 kg
Item Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 3 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 3 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 28 11/32 × 21 7/64"
598 × 720 × 536 mm
Weight Approx. 114.6 lbs. / Approx. 52 kg
Item Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method (No. Sheets: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) × 1 cassette, 1,500
sheets (80 g/m2) × 2 cassettes/No. Sheets: 550 sheets (64 g/m2) × 1 cassette, 1,750
sheets (64 g/m2) × 2 cassettes)
Paper Size Tray 5 A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K,
16K-R, 216 × 340 mm
Tray 6, 7 A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 35/64 × 28 11/32 × 21 7/64"
598 × 720 × 536 mm
Weight Approx. 112.4 lbs / Approx. 51 kg
Appendix-28
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) (Option)
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Item Description
Paper Supply
Method
Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m2/No. Sheets: 3,500 64 g/m2)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 300 g/m2
Media types: standard, recycled, Thick
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
12 41/64 × 24 13/32 × 19 27/32"
321 × 620 × 504 mm
Weight Approx. 55.1 lbs. / Approx. 25 kg
Item Description
Number of Trays 2 tray
Paper
Size
(80 g/
m2)
Tray A
(Non-
stapling)
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", 8K: 500 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter, Letter-R, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Tray B A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, A5-R, A6, B6-R, Letter, Letter-R, Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 12 × 18", Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340 mm,
Oufuku hagaki, Cardstock, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10
(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Statement-R, Executive,
Custom (98 × 148mm to 297 × 432mm): 100 sheets
Supported Paper
Weight
Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling
Number
of Sheets
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", 216 × 340 mm, Folio, 8K,
16K-R
30 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 50 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
Media
types
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
26 7/32 × 24 11 × 32 × 41 21/64"
666 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less
Appendix-29
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Hole Punch Unit (Option)
Item Description
Number of Trays 3 trays
Paper
Size
(80 g/
m2)
Tray A
(Non-
Stapling)
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 1,500 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K, 16K-R, Folio: 4,000 sheets*
A5, B6, Statement-R: 500 sheets
* When the Folding Unit is installed, 3000 sheets.
Tray B A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, 12 × 18", A3, B4, 8K,Letter,
Letter-R, Statement-R, 16K, 16K-R: 200 sheets
Tray C A4, B5, B5 (ISO), B5-R, B6, A5, A5-R, A6, A6-R, Letter, Statement-R, 16K,
Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki: 100 sheets
Stapling
Maximum
Number
A3, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II,
12 × 18", 216 × 340 mm, Folio, 8K,
16K-R
30 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
Media
types
Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
23 29/32 × 26 5/16 × 41 25/32"
607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm
Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs or less / Approx. 40 kg or less
Item Description
Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, Folio, 8K, 16K, Letter-R, Legal, 12 × 18", Statement-R, A5-R,
B5-R, 16K-R
Paper Weight 45 - 300 g/m2
Media types 4,000-sheet Finisher Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Thick, Coated, High Quality
1,000-sheet Finisher Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Thick,
Coated, High Quality
Appendix-30
Mailbox (Option)
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Item Description
Number of Trays 7
Paper Size
(80 g/m2)
A3, B4, Ledger, Legal: 50 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Letter, Letter-R, 216 × 340 mm, Exective, Folio, 8K, 16K,
16K-R, Statement-R, Oficio II: 100 sheets
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
20 1/16 × 15 3/4 × 18 1/2"
510 mm × 400 mm × 470 mm
Weight Approx. 22 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg
Item Description
Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, 8K
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, 8K
Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R
Number of Sheets Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
Maximum Number
for Storage
(80 g/m2)
Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.
Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more
2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets or more
Media types Bi-Fold Plain, Bond, Recycled, Prepunched, High Quality
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Prepunched
Appendix-31
Inner Job Separator (Option)
Right Job Separator (Option)
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Maximum Sheets 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Letter-R, Executive,
Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm
Paper Type Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunch, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
17 7/16 × 15 7/16 × 4 1/64"
443 × 392 × 102 mm
Weight 1.76 lbs. / 0.8 kg
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Maximum Sheets A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, Ledger, Legal, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm: 30 sheets
(80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Letter-R,
Executive, Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 216 × 340mm
Paper Type Paper weight: 60 - 256 g/m2
Paper type: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Rough, Recycled, Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunch, Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
14 27/32 × 17 13/32 × 5 29/32"
377 × 442 × 150 mm
Weight 5.1 lbs. / 2.3 kg
Appendix-32
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically
challenged or visually impaired. Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in
two angles.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer
sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk
network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto
form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no
output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However,
DHCP requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses
between 169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assinged automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data
transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers,
devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows
devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.
Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check
that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only
certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is
registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP
Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
Appendix-33
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and
gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large
number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being
assigned.
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It
extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to
hosts on the network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send
configuration parameters to an IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated
automatically, the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to
exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi(dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates
operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).
FTP(File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and
SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying
from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits;
and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.
Help
A Help key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine,
would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press
the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the
network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each
number should be between 0 and 255.
Appendix-34
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs
to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view
websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on
smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of
routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and
Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part
1: Use of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and
is a specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO
19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-
functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level
3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in
implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine
is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the
machine.
Appendix-35
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This
information is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a
IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol
Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be
selected from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail
servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper
source settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask
represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix
indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the
network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address
"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix
(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the
subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP
setting to Off.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each
other over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet
protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under
IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to
prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers.
The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN
is adopted on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
Appendix-36
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is
equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral
devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions
and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any
application.
Index
Index-1
Index
Symbols
(Paper Width Guide) Lock 1-6
Numerics
1,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
Staple Jam 12-55
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Paper Jams 12-41
2-sided/Book Original 6-11
4,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
Staple Jam 12-56
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option)
Paper Jams 12-42
A
Accessibility 9-110, Appendix-32
Accounting Setting
Accounting List 10-22
Address Book
Contact 9-79
Group 9-82
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-10
Adjustment/Maintenance
Auto Color Correction 9-69
Background Density Adj. 9-67
Calibration 9-72
Color Calibration Cycle 9-71
Color Registration 9-69
Correcting Black Lines 9-68
Density Adjustment 9-66
Developer Refresh 9-73
Display Brightness 9-69
Drum Refresh 9-67
First Print Position 9-73
Laser Scanner Cleaning 9-73
Silent Mode 9-69
System Initialization 9-68
Tone Curve Adjustment 9-72
Apache License (Version 2.0) xxxv
AppleTalk Appendix-32
Setup 2-15
Applications
Installing Applications 9-88
Launching Applications 9-89
Authorization Rules
Copy Restriction 10-13
Copy Restriction (Color) 10-13
Copy Restriction (Full Color) 10-13
Fax TX Restriction 10-13
Print Restriction 10-13
Print Restriction (Color) 10-13
Send Restriction 10-13
Storing Restr. in Box 10-13
Storing Restr. in Memory 10-13
Auto Image Rotation 4-44
Auto Low Power Mode 2-9
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-32
Auto Sending
Sending Log History 9-64
Auto Sleep 2-10, Appendix-32
B
Background density adj.
Copy 4-40
Send 6-22
Bates Stamp 4-32, 6-39
Bonjour Appendix-32
Booklet 4-20
Booklet from Sheets
Left side 4-20
Right side 4-20
Top binding 4-20
Border Erase
Copy 4-18
Send 6-26
Bundled Items 2-2
Index
Index-2
C
Calibration 9-72
Calibration Cycle 9-71
Cassette
Loading Paper 2-29
Paper Size and Media Type 9-6
Cassette 1 to 7 1-4
Cassette 5 (Option)
Paper Jams 12-49
Cassette 6,7 (Option)
Paper Jams 12-51
Center-Folding Unit (Option)
Paper Jams 12-47
Centering 6-7
Changing Language 2-11, 9-2
Character Entry Method Appendix-9
Cleaning
Dual scanning area 11-16
Glass Platen 11-15
Platen Cover 11-15
Platen Cover / Glass Platen 11-15
Separator 11-18
Slit Glass 11-16
Transfer Roller 11-19
Cleaning Brush 1-5
Clip Holder 1-5
Collate/Offset 3-15
Color
Background Density Adj. 4-40, 6-22
Calibration Cycle 9-71
Color balance 4-35
Color Registration 9-69
Color Selection 6-23
Color Type 6-41, 9-45
Hue adjust 4-36
One touch image adjust 4-37
Single Color 4-34
Tone Curve Adjustment 9-72
Color balance 4-35
Color mode 3-7
Color Selection (Copy) 9-19
Color Selection (Send/Store) 9-19
Color Registration
Auto Correction 9-70
Manual Setting 9-70
Color type 6-41
Combine
Copy 4-14
Combine Mode
2-in-1 Mode 4-14
4-in-1 Mode 4-15
Page Boundary Lines 4-15
COMMAND CENTER RX 2-24
Common Settings
Color Toner Empty Action 9-16
Customize Status Display 9-40
Default Screen 9-3
Error Handling 9-13
Function Defaults 9-16
Language 9-2
Low Toner Alert Level 9-40
Manual Staple 9-39
Orientation Confirmation 9-16
Original/Paper Settings 9-4
Paper Output 9-15
Sound 9-4
System Stamp 9-30
USB Keyboard Type 9-30
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-5
Power Cable 2-6
USB Cable 2-6
Connection Method 2-3
Continuous Scan
Copy 4-43
Send 6-24
Conventions in This Guide xl
Copy 9-41, Appendix-8
Collate/Offset 3-15
Combine 4-14
Density 3-9
Duplex 3-13
EcoPrint 4-34
Original Image 3-10
Originals 4-2
Zoom 3-11
Copy Settings
Auto % Priority 9-42
Auto Paper Selection 9-42
Border Erase for Back Page 9-41
Paper Selection 9-41
Index
Index-3
Preset Limit 9-43
Quick Setup Registration 9-43
Reserve Next Priority 9-43
Copying Functions 4-1
Counting the Number of Pages
Printed 10-28
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Counter 3-62, 10-33
Unknown ID Job 10-33
Cover 4-22
Custom Box
Creating a New Box 7-2
Deleting Documents 7-13
Editing Documents 7-10
Form Overlay 7-9
Join Documents 7-11
Move Documents 7-10
Printing Documents 7-5
Sending Documents 7-7
Storing Documents 7-4
User Privileges 3-50
D
Daily Maintenance
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
11-12
Replacing Staples 11-8
Toner Container Replacement 11-2
Waste Toner Box Replacement 11-5
Data Security
Data Sanitization 9-107, 9-108
Data Security Kit Appendix-7
Date/Timer
Auto Error Clear 9-77
Auto Panel Reset 9-75
Auto Sleep 9-76
Date Format 9-74
Date/Time 9-74
Error Job Skip 9-78
Interrupt Clear Timer 9-78
Low Power Timer 9-76
Time Zone 9-75
Default 9-16
Auto Image Rotation 9-24
Backgrnd Density (Copy) 9-21
BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) 9-21
Border Erase 9-23
Border Erase to Back Page 9-23
Collate/Offset 9-24
Color Selection (Copy) 9-19
Color Selection (Send/Store) 9-19
Color TIFF Compression 9-26
Continuous Scan 9-27
EcoPrint 9-24
E-mail Subject/Body 9-29
File Format 9-20
File Name Entry 9-28
High Comp. PDF Image 9-25
Image Quality (File Format) 9-26
JPEG/TIFF Print 9-27
Margin Default 9-24
Original Image (Copy) 9-17
Original Image (Send/Store) 9-18
Original Orientation 9-17
PDF/A 9-28
Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) 9-22
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 9-21
Repeat Copy 9-29
Scan Resolution 9-18
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) 9-25
XPS Fit to Page 9-27
Zoom 9-22
Default Gateway Appendix-32
Default Setting
Apply Limit 10-26
Copier/Printer Count 10-24
Count by Paper Size 10-30
Density 6-19
Copy 3-9
Send 6-19
Dest. Check before Send 9-44
Destination
Address Book 3-40
Editing 9-83
Narrow Down 9-85
One Touch Key 3-42
Quick No. Search key 3-4
Search 3-41
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-42
Sort 9-85
Index
Index-4
Speed Dial 3-42
Device 8-14
Canceling FAX Communication 8-16
Checking Status 8-14
Configuring 8-15
Displaying Screen 8-14
USB Memory 8-16
DHCP Appendix-33
DHCP (IPv6) Appendix-33
Document Box 3-43, 7-1
Basic Operation 3-45
Custom Box 3-43, 7-2
Document deletion time 7-3
Form Overlay 7-9
Job Box 3-43, 7-14
Quick Setup Registration 9-54
What is Document Box? 3-43
Document Finisher 1-4
Document Processor 1-5, Appendix-4,
Appendix-26
How to Load Originals 2-47
Loading Originals 2-46
Not Supported Originals 2-46
Part Names 2-46
Supported Originals 2-46
Document Table Appendix-8
Double Copy 4-29
dpi Appendix-33
Duplex 3-13, 9-58
Duplex unit 12-32
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 12-33
DVD 2-2
E
EcoPrint 4-34
EcoPrint Mode Appendix-33
Print 9-57
Edit Destination
Address Book 9-79
One Touch Key 9-83
E-mail
Send as E-mail 3-24
E-mail Subject/Body
Sending 6-29
Emptying the Punch Waste Box (Option)
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-13
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-14
Emulation Appendix-33
Selection 9-55
Emulation Option Appendix-8
Energy Star Program xxxviii
Enhanced WSD
Setup 9-98
Enhanced WSD (SSL)
Setup 9-99
Enlarged Display 9-110
Enter key 3-4
Entry
File Name 4-48
Entry Check for New Dest. 9-45
Error Handling
Duplexing Error 9-13
Finished Pages Exceeded 9-13
Finishing Error 9-13
Inserted Paper Mismatch 9-14
No Staple Error 9-13
Paper Jam before Staple 9-14
Paper Mismatch Error 9-14
Punch Waste Full Error 9-14
Error Job Skip 9-78
Error Messages 12-8
Expansion Memory Appendix-7
F
FAX Kit Appendix-7
File
Format 6-14
PDF 6-16
File Name Entry 4-48
Sending 6-28
File Separation 6-15
Fixing unit 12-35
Fold 4-11
Folding Unit Appendix-6
Form Overlay 4-23
Storing a Form 7-20
Front Cover 1-4
FTP Appendix-33
FTP (Reception)
Protocol Detail 9-96
Index
Index-5
FTP Encrypted TX 6-37
G
Gigabit Ethernet Board Appendix-7
Glass Platen
Cleaning 11-15
GPL/LGPL xxxii
Grayscale 6-23, Appendix-33
H
Handle 1-6
Handles 1-5
Help Appendix-33
Help Screen 3-62
Checking what to enter for 3-30
Host Name 9-92
HTTP
Protocol Detail 9-96
HTTP Security
Setup 9-100
HTTPS
Protocol Detail 9-96
Hue adjustment 4-36
I
Image Repeat 4-29
Included Guides 2
Inner Job Separator Appendix-6
Inner Tray 1-6
Installing
Macintosh 2-19
Software 2-16
Windows 2-16
Interface Block 9-104
Interface Block Setting
Optional interface 9-104
USB Device 9-104
USB Host 9-104
Internet Browser 3-59
Internet Browser Setting
Browser Preferences 9-86
Internet Browser Setting 9-86
Proxy Settings 9-87
Internet Fax Kit (A) Appendix-7
Interrupt Clear Timer 9-78
Interrupt Copy 3-18
IP Address Appendix-33
IPP Appendix-34
IPP over SSL
Protocol Detail 9-96
IPP Security
Setup 9-100
IPSec 9-102
J
Job
Available Status 8-2
Canceling 3-52, 8-11
Checking History 8-9
Checking Status 8-2
Detailed Information 8-7
Detailed Information of Histories 8-10
Details of the Status Screens 8-3
Displaying History Screen 8-9
Displaying Status Screens 8-2
Pause and Resumption 8-11
Reordering 8-12
Sending the Log History 9-64
Job Accounting
Restricting the Use of the Machine 10-
24
Job Accounting Setting 10-20
Each Job Accounting 10-29
Job Accounting 10-20
Print Accounting Report 10-32
Total Job Accounting 10-29
Job Box
Form for Form Overlay 7-20
Private Print/Stored Job Box 7-14
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 7-15
Repeat Copy 7-18
Job Finish Notice 6-35
Copy 4-46
Send 6-35
Job Log Subject
Sending Log History 9-65
Index
Index-6
K
Key Counter Appendix-7
Knopflerfish License xxxv
KPDL Appendix-34
L
Label Appendix-19
LAN Cable
Connecting 2-5
LAN Interface
Setup 9-103
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x 2)
Appendix-4
Laser Scanner Cleaning 9-73
LDAP
Protocol Detail 9-96
LDAP Security
Setup 9-101
Legal Information xxxi
Local Authorization
Copy Restriction 10-5
Copy Restriction (Color) 10-5
Copy Restriction (Full Color) 10-5
Fax TX Restriction 10-5
Print Restriction 10-5
Print Restriction (Color) 10-5
Send Restriction 10-5
Storing Restr. in Box 10-5
Storing Restr. in Memory 10-5
Login 3-2, 10-3
Logout 3-2, 10-3
Long document 5-5
Low Power Timer 9-76
LPD
Protocol Detail 9-96
M
Mailbox 1-4, Appendix-6
Main Power Switch 1-6
Management 10-1
Manual Staple
Manual Staple 9-39
Staple Position 9-39
Manual staple mode Appendix-4
Margin/Centering 4-16
Measurement 9-12
Media for Auto (Color/B&W) 9-10
Media Type Setting 9-8
Memo Page 4-26
Mirror Image 4-45
Mixed Size Originals 4-6
Combinations 4-6
Copy Size 4-8
Send 6-8
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
xxxiv
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-34
Paper Size and Media 2-42, 9-7
Multi Purpose Tray 1-6
Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types
of Destinations ) 3-42
N
Negative Image 4-44
NetBEUI Appendix-34
Protocol Detail 9-96
NetWare Appendix-34
Setup 9-97
Network
Enhanced WSD 9-98
Enhanced WSD (SSL) 9-99
Host Name 9-92
IPSec 9-102
LAN Interface 9-103
NetWare 9-97
Preparation 2-13
Restart Network 9-103
Secure Protocol 9-99
TCP/IP (IPv4) 9-93
TCP/IP (IPv6) 9-94
WSD Print 9-98
WSD Scan 9-98
Network Cable 2-4
Connecting 2-5
Network Interface 2-4
Network Interface Connector 1-5
Index
Index-7
O
OHP Backing Sheet 4-51
One Touch Key
Changing the Registered
Information 9-84
Deleting the Registered
Information 9-84
Editing 9-84
One-touch image adjust 4-37
Open SSL xxxii
Operation Panel 1-5
Option
1,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
4,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-4
Data Security Kit Appendix-7
Document Processor Appendix-4
Document Table Appendix-8
Emulation Option Appendix-8
Expansion Memory Appendix-7
FAX Kit Appendix-7
Folding Unit Appendix-6
Gigabit Ethernet Board Appendix-7
Inner Job Separator Appendix-6
Internet Fax Kit (A) Appendix-7
Key Counter Appendix-7
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet x
2) Appendix-4
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) Appendix-4
Mailbox Appendix-6
Overview Appendix-2
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)
Appendix-4
Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix-
8
Right Job Separator Appendix-6
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) Appendix-4
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) Appendix-
4
USB Keyboard Appendix-8
Option Interface 1-5
Optional Job Separator
Paper Jams 12-38
Orientation Confirmation 9-16
Original
Loading in the Document
Processor 2-46
Placing on the Platen 2-44
Size xli
Original Auto Detect 9-10
Original Image
Send 6-18
Original Orientation
Copy 4-9
Document Processor 4-9
Orientation Confirmation 9-16
Send 6-12
Original Placement Indicator
Indications and Status 2-48
Original Size
Send 6-2
Original Size Indicator Plates 1-5, 2-44
Original SSLeay License xxxiii
Originals
Automatic Detection 9-10
Copy 4-2
Custom 9-4
Setup 9-4
Size Selection 4-2, 6-2
P
Page # 4-24
Paper
Appropriate Paper Appendix-14
Auto Selection 9-10
Before Loading 2-28
Cassette 9-6
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Paper 8-13
Custom 9-5
Default Paper Source 9-9
Loading Envelopes 2-38
Loading in the Cassettes 2-29
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-36
Multi Purpose Tray 9-7
Paper Source for Cover Paper 9-11
Setup 9-4
Size and Media 2-40, Appendix-12
Special Paper 9-11, Appendix-17
Specifications Appendix-13
Index
Index-8
Weight 9-8
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2) Appendix-4
Paper Jam 12-22
Bridge Unit (Option) 12-40
Cassette 1 12-23
Cassette 2 12-24
Cassettes 3 and 4 12-25
Document Processor 12-36
Inside the Right Covers 1, 3 and 4 12-30
Jam Location Indicators 12-22
Multi Purpose Tray 12-29
Precaution 12-23
Paper Jams
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 12-41
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 12-42
Cassette 5 (Option) 12-49
Cassette 6,7 (Option) 12-51
Center-Folding Unit (Option) 12-47
Optional Job Separator 12-38
Paper Length Guide 1-6, 2-29
Paper Output 4-13
Paper Selection 4-3
Cassette 4-3
Multi Purpose Tray 4-4
Paper Width Adjusting Tab 1-6
Paper Width Guide 1-6
Paper Width Guides 2-30
Part Names 1-1
PDF/A Appendix-34
Platen 1-5
Placing Originals 2-44
Platen Cover 1-4
Cleaning 11-15
POP Security (User 1)
Setup 9-102
POP Security (User 2)
Setup 9-102
POP Security (User 3)
Setup 9-102
POP3 Appendix-34
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Protocol Detail 9-96
Poster 4-28
PostScript Appendix-34
Power Cable
Connecting 2-6
Power Off 2-8
Power On 2-7
PPM Appendix-34
Preparation 2-1
Preparation for sending a document to a PC
3-30
Preparing Cables 2-4
Prevent Bleed-thru 4-42, 6-25
Print Job
Reordering 3-53
Print Report
Font List 9-62
Network Status 9-63
Service Status 9-63
Status Page 9-62
Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix-8
Printer Driver Appendix-34
Printer Settings
Color Setting 9-56
Copies 9-58
CR Action 9-60
Duplex 9-58
EcoPrint 9-57
Emulation 9-55
Form Feed Timeout 9-59
Gloss Mode 9-56
Job Name 9-60
LF Action 9-60
Orientation 9-59
Override A4/Letter 9-57
Paper Feed Mode 9-61
Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) 9-57
User Name 9-61
Printing 5-2
Help 5-4
Long document 5-5
print settings 5-3
Printing from Applications 5-2
Printing Reports/Sending Notice
Send Result Report 9-63
Priority Override 4-48, 8-12
Product Library 2-2
Programmed Copying 3-56
Editing and Deleting 3-57
Recalling 3-57
Registering 3-56
Index
Index-9
Protocol Detail 9-96
Punch 3-21
Q
Quick No. Search key 3-4
Quick Setup Screen 3-53
Changing Registration 3-54, 9-43, 9-44,
9-54
R
RA (Stateless) Appendix-35
Raw Port
Protocol Detail 9-96
Regular Maintenance 11-2
Release button 1-5
Repeat Copy 4-49
Maximum Number 4-50
Outputting 4-49
Selecting 4-49
Replacing Staples
1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-8
4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) 11-10
Report
Print Report 9-62
Reserve Next 3-17
Reserve Next Priority 9-43
Resolution Appendix-24
Restart Network 9-103
Right Cover 1 1-6
Right Cover 1 Lever 1-6
Right Cover 2 1-6
Right Cover 2 Lever 1-6
Right Cover 3 1-6
Right Cover 3 Lever 1-6
Right Job Separator Appendix-6
S
Safety Conventions i
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) xxvi
Saturation 4-41
Scan Resolution 6-20
Default settings 9-18
Scanning
TWAIN 6-32
Secure Protocol 9-99
HTTP Security 9-100
IPP Security 9-100
LDAP Security 9-101
POP Security (User 1) 9-102
POP Security (User 2) 9-102
POP Security (User 3) 9-102
SMTP Security 9-101
SSL 9-99
Send
Default Screen 9-46
Dest. Check before Send 9-44
Entry Check for New Dest. 9-45
File Format 6-14
Original Image 6-18
Original Size 6-2
Print 6-36
Sending Size 6-4
Store 6-36
Send and Forward
Color Setting 9-48
Destination 9-47
E-mail Subject 9-52
File Format 9-49
File Separation 9-52
Forward 9-46
FTP Encrypted TX 9-52
Scan Resolution 9-49
Send Log History
Sending Log History 9-65
Send to Folder
Sending 3-25
Sending 9-44
E-mail Subject/Body 6-29
File Name Entry 6-28
Send as E-mail 3-24
Send to Folder 3-25
Send to Folder (FTP) 3-27
Send to Folder (SMB) 3-27
Sending E-mail 2-25
Sending Functions 6-1
Sending Log History
Auto Sending 9-64
Job Log Subject 9-65
Send Log History 9-65
Index
Index-10
Sending Settings
Color Type 9-45
Quick Setup Registration 9-44
Send and Forward 9-46
Sending Size 6-4
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending) 3-42
Separator
Cleaning 11-18
Setting Date and Time 2-12
Setting Driver
TWAIN 2-22
WIA 2-23
Sharpness 4-39
Copy 4-39
Sharpness adjust
Send 6-21
Shortcuts 3-58
Adding 3-58
Single Color 4-34
Sleep 2-10
Slit Glass 1-5
Cleaning 11-16
SMTP Appendix-35
SMTP (E-mail TX)
Protocol Detail 9-96
SMTP Security
Setup 9-101
SNMP
Protocol Detail 9-96
SNMPv3
Protocol Detail 9-96
Solving Malfunctions 12-2
Specifications Appendix-21
1,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-28
4,000-sheet Finisher Appendix-29
Center-Folding Unit Appendix-30
Document Processor Appendix-26
Hole Punch Unit Appendix-29
Inner Job Separator Appendix-31
Large Capacity Feeder Appendix-27
Large Capacity Side Feeder (500,
1,500-sheet x 2) Appendix-27
Machine Appendix-21
Mailbox Appendix-30
Paper Feeder Appendix-26
Printer Appendix-24
Right Job Separator Appendix-31
Scanner Appendix-25
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) Appendix-
28
Side Feeder (500-sheet x 3) Appendix-
27
Specifying Destination 3-29, 3-40
SSL
Setup 9-99
Staple
Mixed Size Stapling 3-20
Staple Jam 12-55
1,000-sheet Finisher 12-55
4,000-sheet Finisher 12-56
Status / Job Cancel 8-1
Status Page 9-62, Appendix-35
Subnet Mask Appendix-35
Supplies
Checking the Remaining Amount 8-13
Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose
Tray 1-6
Switching the Language 2-11
Symbols i
System
Document Guard 9-105
Optional Functions 9-109
Restart Entire Device 9-91
System Initialization 9-91
System Menu 9-1
Adjustment/Maintenance 9-66
Application 9-88
Common Settings 9-2
Copy 9-41
Date/Timer 9-74
Document Box/Removable Memory 9-
53
Edit Destination 9-79
Internet 9-86
Network 9-92
Printer 9-55
Report 9-62
Send 9-44
User Property 10-9
System Stamp
Basic 9-30
Index
Index-11
Printing Jobs 9-31
Sending Jobs 9-34
Storing Jobs 9-36
Systme
Data Security 9-107
T
TCP/IP Appendix-35
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Setup 2-13
TCP/IP (IPv6) Appendix-33
TCP/IP Setting
IPv4 9-93
IPv6 9-94
Protocol Detail 9-96
Text Stamp 4-31, 6-38
ThinPrint
Protocol Detail 9-96
Tone Curve Adjustment 9-72
Toner Container 1-5
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Toner 8-13
Toner Container Release Lever 1-5
Trade Names xxxi
Transfer Roller
Cleaning 11-19
TWAIN Appendix-35
U
USB Appendix-36
USB Cable
Connecting 2-6
USB Interface 2-4
USB Interface Connector (B1) 1-5
USB Keyboard Appendix-8
USB Memory
Printing Documents 7-22
Removing 7-26
Saving Documents 7-24
USB Port (A1) 1-6
USB Port (A2) 1-5
User Login Administration
Adding 10-5
Changing User Properties 10-8
Guest Authorization Settings 10-12
Login 10-3
Logout 10-4
User Login Setting 10-2
Group Authorization Set. 10-10
Local Authorization 10-9
Obtain NW User Property 10-15
User Login 10-2
User Login/Job Accounting
Job Accounting Setting 10-20
Unknown ID Job 10-10
User Login Setting 10-2
W
Waste Toner Box 1-5
Status 8-13
Waste Toner Tray 1-5
Weekly Timer 3-61
WIA Appendix-36
WSD Print
Setup 9-98
WSD Scan 6-30
Setup 9-98
X
XPS
File formats 6-14, 9-20
Printing documents stored in
Removable USB Memory 7-22
Saving documents to Removable USB
Memory 7-24
Z
Zoom 3-11
Zoom Copying
Auto Zoom 3-11
Manual Zoom 3-11
Preset Zoom 3-11
XY Zoom 3-12
Zoom Mode
Copy 6-6
Send 6-6
Index
Index-12
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the
use of third party supplies in this machine.
Rev.2 2011.5
2LCKMEN102

Navigation menu